英语语法大全
初中英语语法
学习提纲
一、词类、句子成分和构词法：
1、词类：英语词类分十种：
名词、形容词、代词、数词、冠词、动词、副词、介词、连词、感叹词。
1、名词(n.)： 表示人、事物、地点或抽象概念的名称。如：boy, morning, bag, ball, class, orange.
2、代词(pron.)： 主要用来代替名词。如：who, she, you, it .
3、形容词(adj..)：表示人或事物的性质或特征。如：good, right, white, orange .
4、数词(num.)： 表示数目或事物的顺序。如：one, two, three, first, second, third, fourth.
5、动词(v.)： 表示动作或状态。如：am, is,are,have,see .
6、副词(adv.)： 修饰动词、形容词或其他副词,说明时间、地点、程度等。如：now, very, here, often, quietly, slowly.
7、冠词(art..)：用在名词前,帮助说明名词。如：a, an, the.
8、介词(prep.)： 表示它后面的名词或代词与其他句子成分的关系。如in, on, from, above, behind.
9、连词(conj.)： 用来连接词、短语或句子。如and, but, before .
10、感叹词(interj..)表示喜、怒、哀、乐等感情。如：oh, well, hi, hello.
2、句子成分：英语句子成分分为七种：主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、宾语补足语。
1、主语是句子所要说的人或事物,回答是?谁?或者?什么?。通常用名词或代词担任。如：I’m Miss Green.(我是格林小姐)
2、谓语动词说明主语的动作或状态,回答?做(什么)?。主要由动词担任。如：Jack cleans the room every day. (杰克每天打扫房间)
3、表语在系动词之后,说明主语的身份或特征,回答是?什么?或者?怎么样?。通常由名词、代词或形容词担任。如：My name is Ping ping .(我的名字叫萍萍)
4、宾语表示及物动词的对象或结果,回答做的是?什么?。通常由名词或代词担任。如：He can spell the word.(他能拼这个词)
有些及物动词带有两个宾语,一个指物,一个指人。指物的叫直接宾语,指人的叫间接宾语。间接宾语一般放在直接宾语的前面。如：He wrote me a letter . (他给我写了一封信)
有时可把介词to或for加在间接宾语前构成短语,放在直接宾语后面,来强调间接宾语。如：He wrote a letter to me . (他给我写了一封信)
5、定语修饰名词或代词,通常由形容词、代词、数词等担任。如：
Shanghai is a big city .(上海是个大城市)
6、状语用来修饰动词、形容词、副词,通常由副词担任。如：He works hard .(他工作努力)
7、宾语补足语用来说明宾语怎么样或干什么,通常由形容词或动词充当。如：They usually keep their classroom clean.(他们通常让教室保持清洁) / He often helps me do my lessons.(他常常帮我做功课) / The teacher wanted me to learn French all by myself.(老师要我自学法语)
☆同位语通常紧跟在名词、代词后面,进一步说明它的情况。如：Where is your classmate Tom ?(你的同学汤姆在哪里？)
3、构词法：英语构词法主要有：合成法、派生法和转换法。
1、合成法：如：spaceship, headache, basketball, playground等等。
2、派生法：
(1)派生名词：⒈动词+er/or ⒉动词+ing ⒊动词+(t)ion ⒋形容词+ness ⒌其他,如：inventor, learner, swimming, congratulation, kindness, carelessness, knowledge
(2)派生形容词：⒈名词+y ⒉名词+ful ⒊动词+ing/ed ⒋friendly ⒌dangerous ⒍Chinese; Japanese ⒎English ⒏French ⒐German ⒑国名+(i)an 如：snowy, sunny, hopeful, beautiful, interesting, follwing, daily(每日的),nervous, delicious
(3)派生副词：⒈形容词+ly ⒉其它,如：slowly, angrily, full→fully, good→well, possible→possibly等等。
3、转换法：
(1)形容词→动词,如：dry(干燥的)→dry(弄干), clean(干净的)→clean(打扫,弄干净),等等。
(2)动词→名词,如：look, walk, rest, work, study, swim, go, talk等等。
(3)名词→动词,如：hand(手)→(传递),face(脸)→(面对)等等。
(4)形容词→副词,如：early→early, fast→fast等等。
(5)副词→连词,如：when(什么时候)→(当……时候),等等。
(6)介词→副词,如：in(到……里)→(在里面；在家),on(在…上)→(进行,继续),等等。
二、名词：
1、英语名词可分专有名词和普通名词两大类：
1、专有名词是个别的人、地、物、团体、机构等的专用名称。
专有名词中实词的第一个字母要大写。
如：Beijing, Tom, the People’s Republic of China(中华人民共和国) 专有名词如果是含有普通名词的短语,则必须使用定冠词the。如：the Great Wall(长城)
姓氏名如果采用复数形式,则表示该姓氏一家人(复数含义),如：the Greens( 格林一家人)。
2、普通名词是许多人或事物的共有名称。如：pupil, family, man, foot. 普通名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词。
▲可数名词是可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词,如： box, child, orange；
▲不可数名词是不可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词。如：water, news, oil, population, information .
2、英语可数名词的单复数：英语可数名词有单数和复数两种形式。
1、名词由单数变复数的基本方法如下：
⒈在单数名词词尾加s。如：map → maps,boy→ boys,horse→ horses, table→ tables.
⒉s,o,x ,sh,ch结尾的词加es.如：class→classes, box→boxes, hero→heroes, dish→dishes, bench→benches.
[注]：少数以o结尾的词,变复数时只加s。如：photo→photos, piano→pianos. ⒊以辅音字母加y结尾的名词,变y为i,再加es。如：family→families, city→cities, party→parties.
⒋以f或fe结尾的名词,变f或fe为v,再加es。如：shelf→shelves, wolf→wolves, life→lives, knife→knives.
2、不规则变化：man→men, woman→women, sheep→sheep,tooth→teeth, fish→fish, child→children, ox→oxen, goose→geese
不可数名词一般没有复数形式,说明其数量时,要用有关计量名词。如：a bag of rice→two bags of rice, a piece of paper→three pieces of paper, a bottle of milk→five bottles of milk.
3、名词所有格：
1、 名词所有格表示所属关系,相当于物主代词,在句中作定语、宾语或主语。其构成法如下：
(1)表示人或其它有生命的东西的名词常在词尾加’s。如：Childern’s Day(儿童节), my sister’s book(我姐姐的书)
(2)以s或es结尾的复数名词。只在词尾加’。如：Teachers’ Day(教师节)
(3)有些表示时间、距离以及世界、国家、城镇等无生命的名词,也可在词尾加’s. 如：
today’s newspaper(今天的报纸), ten minutes’ break(十分钟的课间休息), China’s population(中国的人口).
(4)无论表示有生命还是无生命的东西的名词,一般均可用介词of短语来表示所有关系。如：
a fine daughter of the Party(党的好女儿).
2、[注解]：
⒈ ‘s还可以表示某人的家或者某个店铺,如：my aunt’s(我阿姨家), the doctor’s(诊所)
⒉ 两人共有某物时,可以采用 A and B’s 的形式,如：Lucy and Lily’s bedroom(露西和丽丽合住的卧室)
⒊ ?of+名词所有格/名词性物主代词?,称为双重所有格,如：a friend of my father’s(我父亲的一位朋友), a friend of mine(我的一位朋友)
4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题：
1、谓语和谓语基本保持单复数的一致,即：主语是可数名词单数或不可数名词时,谓语动词用单数形式：如：The computer was a great invention.(计算机是个了不起的发明)The water in the glass is very cold.(玻璃杯里的水很冷)
2、集体名词(如family, class, team, group, row, police, school等)做句子主语时,
⒈ 如果表示整体概念,则谓语用单数形式,如：Class Three is a very good class.(三班是好班)
⒉ 如果表示其中的所有成员时,则谓语用复数形式,如：Class Three have a map of China.(三
班有张中国地图)
3、Chinese, Japanese, fish, sheep, people等表示单个时谓语用单数,表示许多时,谓语用复数。如：There is a sheep in the yard.(院子里有只绵羊) / There are some sheep in the yard.(院子里有一些绵羊)
4、maths, news等虽然有s结尾,但不是复数,因此谓语仍用单数：The news is very exciting. (这个消息令人兴奋)
5、glasses, shoes, socks, trousers, gloves等名词往往用复数形式,故谓语用复数。如：
The trousers are very cheap and I want to take them.(裤子很便宜,我想买)
6、a lot of 后跟名词复数时谓语用复数形式,跟不可数名词时谓语用单数形式。如：A lot of students are playing baseball now.(现在有许多学生在打垒球) A lot of time was wasted on that work.(大量的时间花在了那个工作上)(被动句)
7、and 连接两个名词做主语时,谓语原则上用复数,但是两个名词若构成一个整体事物时,谓语则用单数。如：The teacher and his son are picking apples now.(老师和他的儿子在摘苹果) / Fish and chips is very famous food. (鱼和薯条是一种出名的食品)
8、 there be 句型中be的单复数一般由靠近的名词决定。如：There is a table and four chairs in the room.(房间里有一张桌子和四张椅子)
9、用both…and…连接两个事物做主语时,谓语一般用复数。如：Both you and I are required to be here tomorrow.(你和我明天要求都来)
10、主语中含有with的短语时,谓语单复数由with之前的人物决定。如：A woman with a 7-year-old child was standing at the side of the road. (一名妇女带着一个七岁的孩子(当时)就站在路边)
11、either…or…或者 neither…nor…连接两个人物做句子主语时,谓语采用就近原则。如：Either you or he is right.(要么是你对,要么是他对。/你和他有一个人是对的) / Neither you nor I am going there.(你和我都不打算去那里)
12、表示一段时间或长度概念的复数名词做主语时,谓语一般用单数。如：Two months is not a short time.(两个月不是个短时间)Two thousand kilometers is quite a long distance(距离).(两千千米是相当长的一段距离)
13、主语中含有half of… / (three quarters)of… / all (of) the ….等词语时,谓语的单复数由名词确定,如：Over three quarters of the information on the Internet is in English.(因特网上四分之三以上的信息是用英语写的) / A third of the students were playing near the lake.(学生的三分之一(当时)正在湖边玩耍) / All of the water in these rivers has been polluted.(这些河流中的水已经被污染了)(被动句)
但是,population一词又有特殊情况： What’s the population of China?(中国人口是多少？)(句子用单数) / Three quarters of the population
in this city are Arabs(阿拉伯人).(这个城市四分之三的人口是阿拉伯人)(句子用复数)
5、部分名词用法辨析：
1、sport、game、match、race 的区别：sport通常指?户外运动?,以锻炼为主,概念较大；game意思是?运动、比赛?,不管户内户外还是脑力体力,指以胜负为主的运动；match意为?竞赛、比赛?,多指正式比赛；race主要表示?赛跑、赛马、赛车?。如：People all around the world enjoy sports.(全世界的人都喜爱运动) / The 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing.(2008奥运会将在北京举行)(被动句) / Our school football team won the league match(联赛).(我们学校足球队取得了联赛冠军) / They were strong and won the boat race.(汤他们很棒,赢得了划艇比赛)
2、festival、holiday、vacation的区别：festival?节日?,指喜庆的日子或持续一段时间的文娱活动；holiday(假日、休息日),指法定假日或风俗习惯,复数可以表示一个较长的假期；vacation?假期?,指学习或工作中一段长时间的休息。如：The Shanghai Television Festival will be held next month.(上海电视节将在下个月举行) / Sunday is a holiday and most people do not work.(星期天是个假日,多数人不工作) / What are you going to do during the summer vacation/holidays?(在暑期你打算做什么事情？)
3、journey、tour、trip、travel的区别：journey指在陆地上(或海上或空中)进行的长途旅行,不知终点,含有辛苦的意思；tour指途中作短期逗留的巡回旅行,强调游览多处,常用来指观光等；trip通常指往返定时的短途旅行,如出差度假等；travel多指长期或长途的观光旅行,尤其指到国外,没有明确目的地,也作不可数名词,指旅行这一行为。如：He made up his mind to make the journey to Dunhuang.(他拿定主意要去敦煌旅行)/ He has gone on a walking tour.(他步行观光去了) / He took several trips to Shanghai last yeaar.(去年他去了上海好几次) / Did you go to Santiago(圣地亚哥) during your travels?(旅行期间你去圣地亚哥了吗？) / Travelling through thick forests is dangerous.(在密林里边穿行是很危险的)
4、sound、noise、voice的区别：sound指各种声音；noise主要指?噪音?；voice指人的?嗓音?。如：The noise of the street kept me awake in the night.(街上的喧嚣声让我彻夜难眠) / All of a sudden there was the sound of shots and a cry.(突然间传来几声枪响和一声尖叫) / The singer has lost her ringing voice as a result of a bad cold.(因为感冒的缘故,这个歌唱家失去了她银铃般的嗓音)
5、fish的问题：指许多条鱼且不管种类时,用fish,单复数相同；fishes 指许多种类的鱼；fish指?鱼肉?时是不可数名词。如：There are many kinds of fishes in the pool. (池子里有很多种类的鱼)/ I prefer fish to meat.(与肉相比我更喜欢鱼)
三、代词：
1、代词的分类：英语中代词分为：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、关系代词、疑问代词、连接代词和不定代词等等。
2、人称代词：人称代词代替人和事物的名称,分为主格和宾格两种形式。 第一人
称单数 第二人
称单数 第三人称单数 第一人称复数 第二人称复数 第三人称复数 阳性 阴性 中性
主
格 I
(我) you (你) he
(他) she
(她) it
(它) we
(我们) you
(你们) they (他们,她们,它们)
宾
格 me
(我) you (你) him
(他) her
(她) it
(她) us
(我们) you
(你们) them (他们,她们,它们)
1、主格用来作句子的主语、表语。如： I often go shopping on Sundays.(星期天我常去购物) / Are they from Brazil?(他们是巴西人吗？) / Where have they gone?(他们上哪儿去了？) / That’s it.(就那么回事) / It’s he!(是他！)
2、宾格用来作及物动词或者介词的宾语。如：Who teaches you English this year?(今年谁教你们的英语？) / Help me!(救救我！) / We often write letters to her.(我们常给他写信)
3、人称代词作表语或者放在比较状语从句连词than或as之后时,可以用主格形式,也可以用宾格形式,口语中大多用宾格。如：--Who is it?(是谁？) –It’s I/me.(是我。)
4、 三个不同人称同时出现,或者主语中包含?我?时,按照?you→he→I?的顺序表达。如：
Both he and I are working at that computer company.(我和他都在那家电脑公司上班) –Who will go there?(谁要去那儿？) –You and me.(你和我)
5、 人称代词it除了可以指人指物之外,还可以表示?时间、天气、温度、距离、情况?等含义,此外还可以作?非人称代词?使用,替代作主语或者宾语的不定式、动名词或者名词性从句。如：--What’s the weather like today?(今天天气怎样？)—It’s fine.(天气晴好) / --What’s the time?(几点啦？) –It’s 12：00.(12点) / It’s a long way to go.(那可要走好长的路) / It took him three days to clean his house.(打扫屋子花了他三天的时间) / It is very clear that the public want to know when these men can go into space.(很显然,公众想知道这些人什么时候能进入太空) / We found it very difficult to learn a foreign language well.(我们发觉要学好一门外语是非常困难的)
3、物主代词：说明事物所属关系的代词,分为形容词性和名词性两种。 第一人
称单数 第二人
称单数 第三人称单数 第一人称复 数 第二人称复数 第三人称复数 阳性 阴性 中性
形容
词性 my
(我的) your
(你的) his
(他的) her
(她的) its
(它的) our
(我们的) your
(你们的) their (他们的,她们的,它们的)
名词
性 mine
(我的) Yours
(你的) his
(他的) hers
(她的) its
(她的) ours
(我们的) yours
(你们的) theirs(他们的,她们的,它们的)
1、形容词性物主代词只能作句子中名词的修饰语,后面要跟名词。如：
Is that your umbrella?(那是你的伞吗？) / I often go to see my aunt on Sundays.(我经常在星期天去看望阿姨) / They are their books.(是他们的书)
2、名词性物主代词相当于名词,既代替事物又表明所属关系,在句子中往往独立地作主语、宾语或者表语,后面千万不可以跟名词。如：
This is your cup,but where is mine?(这是你的杯子,可我的在哪儿？) / Your classroom is very big, but ours is rather small.(你们的教室很大,我们的相当小)
3、?of + 名词性物主代词?称为双重所有格,作定语时放在名词的后面。如：
A friend of mine came to see me yesterday.(我的一个朋友昨天来看我了) (指若干朋友中有一个来看我。)
[试比较] My friend came to see me yesterday.(我的朋友昨天来看我了)(指我的那个特定的朋友来看我。)
4、反身代词：表示谓语的动作与主语有关或者宾语补足语的动作与宾语有关。 第一人
称单数 第二人
称单数 第三人称单数 第一人称复数 第二人称复数 第三人称复数 阳性 阴性 中性
myself
(我自己) yourself
(你自己) himself
(他自己) herself
(她自己) itself
(它自己) ourselves
(我们自己) yourselves
(你们自己) themselves (他们/她们/它们自己)
1、反身代词在句子中作宾语表示反射(指一个动作回到该动作执行者本身)。如： Don’t play with the knife, you might hurt yourself.(不要玩刀子,那会割伤你的)
2、在句子中作同位语表示强调(即用来强调名词或代词的语气)。如：
The story itself is good. Only he didn’t tell it well.(故事本身是好的,只是他没有讲好)
6、 指示代词： 指示说明近处或者远处、上文或者下文、以前或者现在的人或事物。
单数 复数 含义
this(这个) these(这些) 指较近的人和物
that(那个) those(那些) 指较远的人和物
such (这样的人/物) 指上文提过的人和物
same (同样的人/物) 指和上文提过的相同的人和物
it (这人/这物) 指不太清楚是谁或者是什么时
指示代词既可以单独使用做句子的主语、宾语或表语,也可以作定语修饰名词。如：
What’s this?(这是什么？) / That model plane is made of plastic.(那只模型飞机是塑料做的)(被动句) / Remember never to do such things.(记得永远不要做这样的事情) / Do the same as the teacher tells you. (按老师说的做)/ ---Who is it?(是谁？) ---It’s me!(是我！)
6、关系代词：用来引导定语从句的代词叫关系代词,参见后面的定语从句。
1、关系代词who 、which、 that 、whom 等,将定语从句和主句连接起来。英语中的关系代词一方面在从句中担任一定的成分,另一方面又起连接作用。 如：The student who is drawing a picture is in Grade One.(正在画画的学生是一年级的)
2、关系代词who / whom指人,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：
Do you know the man who is wearing a red hat? (你认识那个戴着红帽子的男人吗？)
3、关系代词which 指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Have you found the book which you lost several days ago?(你找到几天前丢失的那本书了吗？)
4、关系代词that既可指人也可指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Can you see the man/dog that is running along the river bank ?(你看得见顺着河跑的男人/狗了吗？)
7、连接代词：用来引导宾语从句、主语从句或表语从句的连接词称连接代词。 英语中连接代词主要有：what(什么),who(谁),whom(谁),which(哪个),whose(谁的)。详见相应从句。
8、不定代词：代替或修饰不特指的人或事物的代词叫不定代词。
单数
含义 some
any no
none / / each
(every) one either,
neither so the other,
another 复合不
定代词
不可数
含义 much little,
a little all / / / / /
复数
含义 many few,
a few ones both others,
the others
※ 注：复合不定代词有12个：something(某事), someone(某人), somebody(某人), anything
(任何事), anyone(任何人), anybody(任何人), nothing(没事),nobody(没有人), no one(没有人), everything(一切), everyone(每个人), everybody(每个人).
(1)some和 any 的用法：
some一般用于肯定句中,意思是?几个?、?一些?、?某个?作定语时可修饰可数名词或不可数名词。如：I have some work to do today. (今天我有些事情要做)/ They will go there some day.(他们有朝一日会去那儿)
some 用于疑问句时,表示建议、请求或希望得到肯定回答。如：Would you like some coffee with sugar?(你要加糖的咖啡吗？)
any 一般用于疑问句或否定句中,意思是?任何一些?、?任何一个?,作定语时可修饰可数或不可数名词。如：They didn’t have any friends here. (他们在这里没有朋友)/ Have you got any questions to ask?(你有问题要问吗？) any 用于肯定句时,意思是?任何的?。Come here with any friend.(随便带什么朋友来吧。)
(2)no和none的用法：
no是形容词,只能作定语表示,意思是?没有?,修饰可数名词(单数或复数)或不可数名词。如：There is no time left. Please hurry up.(没有时间了,请快点) / They had no reading books to lend.(他们没有阅读用书可以出借) none只能独立使用,在句子中可作主语、宾语和表语,意思是?没有一个人(或事物)?,表示复数或单数。如：None of them is/are in the classroom.(他们当中没有一个在教室里) / I have many books, but none is interesting.(我有很多的书,但没有一本是有趣的)
(3)all和both的用法：
all指三者或三者以上的人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词；也可用来代替或修饰不可数名词。
both指两个人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词。all和both在句子中作主语、宾语、表语、定语等。如：I know all of the four British students in their school.(他们学校里四个英国学生我全认识) / --Would you like this one or that one? –Both.(你要这个还是那个？两个都要。)
all和both既可以修饰名词(all/both+(the)+名词),也可以独立使用,采用
?all/both + of the +名词(复数)?的形式,其中的of 可以省略。如：All (of) (the) boys are naughty.(是男孩都调皮)
(4)every和each用法：
every是形容词,只能作定语修饰单数名词,意思是?每一个?,表示整体概念； each是形容词、代词,可用作主语、宾语、定语等,意思是?每个?或者?各个?,表示单个概念；each可以放在名词前,可以后跟of短语,与动词同时出现时要放在?be动词、助动词、情态动词?之后或者行为动词之前
every和each都用作单数理解,但是下文中既可以用单数的代词(如he/him/his)也可以用复数的代词(如they/them/their)替代。如：Every one of the students in his class studies very hard.(他班上每个学生学习都很用功) / They are very busy. Each of them has something to do.(他们很忙,人人都有事干)
(5)either和neither的用法：
either意思是?两个中间的任何一个?；neither是either的否定形式,意思是?两个都不?。
neither和either在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语等,都用作单数。如：I don’t care much for what to drink. Either of the two will do. (我不介意喝些什么,两个之中随便哪个都行) / --Will you go there by bus or by car? –Neither. I will go there by train.(你坐公车去还是坐轿车去？一个都不坐,我坐火车去。)
(6)other、the other和another的用法：
other意思是?另一?、?另一些?,有复数形式。在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语。another意思是?另外?、?又一个?,表示增加,在句中可作宾语和定语。如： Some girls are singing under the big apple tree and others are sitting on the grass talking.(有些女孩在大苹果树下唱歌,别的就躺在草地上说话) / You have had several cakes. Do you really want another one?(你已经吃了好几块饼子了,你真的还要一块？) / I want another four books.(我还要四本书)
another(另外的,再一,又一)与the other(另外的一个) 主要从数量上区分,只有两个时用the other,在原先基础上增加用another。如： This is one of your socks. Where is the other one?(这是你的一只袜子,还有一只呢？) / I have eaten 4 cakes, but I still want another.(我已经吃了4块蛋糕,但是我还要以块。)
others与the others的主要区别：others指?剩余的人/物?(指大部分)；the others指?其余的人/物?,(指全部)。如：A few students are playing soccer while others are watching them.(有几个学生在踢足球,其他一些人在观看) / Two of the ten boys are standing and the others are sitting round them.(十个男孩中有两个站着,其他人都围着他们坐着。)
(7)many和much的用法：
many意思是?很多?,与可数名词复数连用；much意思是?很多?,与不可数名词连用。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语等。如：I don’t have many friends here.(在这里我没有很多的朋友。) /Many died in the bus accident.(许多人在公交车祸中丧失) / We can learn much with the help of him.(在他的帮助之下我们能学到很多)
many和much一般用于否定句,肯定句中通常用a lot of 或者lots of; many
/ much用于肯定句时可以在前面加上so、very或too.如： There are a lot of people on the playground.(操场上有许多的人)/ They haven’t got much work to do.(他们没有多少事情可做) / There are too many people in the room.(房间里人太多了。)
(8)few、little、a few、a little的用法：
few、little意思是?很少几个?、?几乎没有?,有否定的意思,a few、a little意思是?有几个?、?有些?,有肯定的意思 ；few、a few与可数名词连用或代替可数的事物, little、a little与不可数名词连用或代替不可数的事物。它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如：
He is very poor and he has little money.(他很穷,几乎没有什么钱。) / Don’t worry. There is still a little time left.(别着急,还有一点儿时间呢。) / In that polar region there live few people.(在那个极地地区几乎不住人) / You can get a few sweets from him.(你可以从他那儿弄到一些糖果)
(9)复合不定代词somebody ,something ,anything, nothing ,everything, everybody等是由some , any ,no ,every, 加上body, thing 构成的,叫做复合不定代词,在句子中当单数使用。
somebody, something, someone 一般用于肯定句中；anything, anybody,anyone一般用于疑问句、否定句和条件状语从句中。修饰复合不定代词的定语,应放在它们的后面。如：Hey,Lily. There is someone outside the door.(嗨,丽丽,门外有人。) /Di(每个人)d you meet anyone when you came to school last Sunday?(上个星期天你来学校时见到什么人了吗？)/He has nothing much to do today.(他今天没有多少事情做)
(10)one与ones用来代替上文的一个或多个人或事物,前面可以加冠词、形容词、指示代词、which等。如： Which jacket would you like, this one or that one?(你要哪件夹克,这件还是那件？ / I don’t like the green ones.(我不喜欢绿色的那些)
(11)so可以代替一件事情,作句子的宾语或表语。如： I don’t think so.(我认为不是这样的。) / He lost a book. So did I.(他丢失了一本书,我也是。)
(12)a lot of、lots of、a number of( /large numbers of)、a great deal of、plenty of的区别：五个?名词+介词?短语都表示?大量,许多?,a lot of(或lots of)既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式,可以相应地换为much和many；plenty of?足够、大量?,既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式。 a number of / large numbers of只可以修饰可数名词复数形式(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用复数形式)可以换为some、many、a lot of、plenty of。 a great deal of只可以修饰不可数名词(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用单数形式)可以换为much。
如：A lot of people think that time is money.(许多的人认为时间就是金钱。) / I don’t have to do it in a hurry because I have plenty of time.(我用不着赶忙,因为我有充足的时间。) / I have a number of letters to write today.(今天我有好多信要写) / I spend a great deal of time/money on shopping.(在购物方面我花费了大量的时间/金钱。)
(13)none、no one、nobody的区别：no one和nobody都表示?没有人?,仅指人,后面不跟of 短语,作主语时谓语用单数形式；none表示?没有一个人/物?,可指人也可以指物,后面可跟of短语,作主语时谓语可用单数也可用复数。如：
No one knows how he managed to get the ticket.(没有人知道他是怎样搞到那张票的) / Nobody handed in his/their composition(s) yesterday.(昨天没有一个人交作文。) / None of my friends came to see me that day.(那天没有一个朋友来看我。)
9、相互代词：表示相互关系的词叫相互代词。
each other ,one another是相互代词,译成?互相?,可以通用。each other表示两者之间,而one anther表示许多人之间。它们有所有格形式each other’s ,one another’s。如： We must help each other when we are in trouble.(我们身处困境时要互相帮助。) / They sat there without talking to one another / each other.(他们坐在那儿,互相都不说话。)
10、疑问代词：用来提出问题的代词称为疑问代词。
1、who、whom、whose、what、which、whoever、whatever、whichever主要用于特殊疑问句中,一般放在句首。口语中也常用who代替whom作宾语,但在介词后则只能用whom。如：
Who(m) did you invite to your birthday party?(你都邀请了谁参加你的生日聚会的？) / What does she want to be when she grows up?(她长大了想干什么？)
2、who 和whom只能独立使用,其中who可以作句子的主语、表语或动词的宾语,whom只能作谓语动词的宾语；而what、which、whose等既可以独立使用作主语、表语和宾语,也可以与名词构成疑问短语。如： Who is that man?(那男的是谁？) / What colour are their hats?(他们的帽子是什么颜色？) / Which car was made in Germany?(哪辆车是德国造的？)(被动句)
注意这个提问：The man in the car is my father.(车里的男人是我父亲) →Which man is your father?(哪个男人是你的父亲？)
3、which除了可以询问指代的情况之外,还可以针对说明人物的时间、地点、岁数、颜色、大小、状况等进行提问。如：People there live a very sad life.(那里的人生活凄惨) →Which people live a sad life? (哪些人生活凄惨？)/ --Which hotel have you booked for your holiday?(为了度假你预订了哪家旅馆？)—The biggest one in Haikou.(海口最大的那家旅馆)
4、疑问代词不分单复数,视它所替代的人或事物决定单复数,但是通常用单数；如果修饰名词,则以名词的单复数为准。如：Who is (are) in that playhouse?(谁在游戏房里？) / What is that? (那是什么？)/ What are those? (那些是什么？) / What colours do they have?(它们有哪些颜色？)
四、数词：
1、分类：数词有基数词和序数词两种。英语的数词可以作句子的主语、宾语、表语和定语。
2、基数词：表示数目的词叫基数词。
1、 英语中常用的基数词有：
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8 9 10 11
12 one two three four five six seven eight nine ten eleven twelve 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
90
100
twenty
thirty
forty
fifty
sixty
seventy
eighty
ninety
one(a) hundred
23
35
101
twenty-three
thirty-five
one hundred and one
1000→one(a) thousand,10000→ ten thousand,100000→one hundred thousand ,1000000→one million,10000000→ten million, 100000000→one hundred million,
108→one hundred and eight, 146→one hundred and forty-six, 500→five hundred , 1001→one thousand and one, 1813→one thousand eight hundred and thirteen.
2、[注]：(1)百位与十位之间要加and；十万位和万位,亿位和千万位之间通常也要加and。
(2)英语用千、百万等单位计数,大数字从右向左看, 每隔三位划一逗号,倒数第一个逗号之前要用thousand,倒数第二个逗号之前要用million,倒数第三的逗
号之前要用billion表示。
(3) hundred、 thousand、 million作数词时,不用复数,前面可以加上one, two, …等其它数词。用作名词时复数表示?成…上…?,后面必须要有of,前面可以加上some,many,several等词。如：five hundred(五百), hundreds of(成百上千的), ten thousand(一万), thousands of(成千上万的), millions of(成百万的)
3、序数词：表示顺序的数词叫序数词。
1、 英语的序数词基本变法：
(1) 一般在基数词后加th,(2)-ve结尾的改为-fth,(3)-ty结尾的改为-tieth,(4)熟记特殊词。
2、序数词如下：
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
11th
12th ※first
※second
※third
fourth
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
eleventh
twelfth
13th
14th
15th
16th
17th
18th
19th
thirteenth fourteenth fifteenth sixteenth seventeenth eighteenth nineteenth
20th
30th
40th
50th
60th
70th
80th
90th
100th twentieth thirtieth fortieth fiftieth sixtieth seventieth eightieth ninetieth one undredth 21st 22nd
23rd
35th
101st
twenty-first twenty-second twenty-third
thirty-fifth
one hundred and first
1000th→one thousandth, 1000000th →one millionth., 第703→the seven hundred and third,
第5480→the five thousand four hundred and eightieth.
3、注：(1)两位以上的序数词仅个位数部分用序数词,其余部分仍用基数词。如：thirty-sixth,
(2) 使用序数词时一般加定冠词the. 如：I’m in the third grade.
(3) 序数词作?几分之几?讲时,有复数形式。如：1/5→one fifth ; 2/3→ two thirds ; 4/7→ four sevenths ; 1/2→ a half ; 1/4→a quarter ; 3/4→ three quarters ; 50%→ fifty hundredths ( fifty per cent).
4、数词的用法：
1、表示年份：2002: twenty thousand and two ; 1976 : nineteen seventy-six.
2、表示日期： 12月1日: Dec.1st或the first of December；20xx年11月8日: Nov. 8th, 2002.
3、表示时刻： 5：15→ five fifteen或a quarter past five ; 8：30→ eight thirty或half past eight ; 10：45→ ten forty-five或a quarter to eleven.
4、表示编号：Room 105→Room one 0 five; Bus No.13→Bus Number Thirteen; P.5→Page Five; Tel.No.7658659→Telephone Number seven-six-five-eight-six-five-nine
5、小数的读法：5.7→ five point seven, 0.16 →zero point one six.
6、?半?的表达： 1/2→half, 半小时→half an hour, 1.5小时→one and a half hours或one hour and a half.
7、序数词前面加the时,表示顺序,加a/an时表示?再一、又一?。如：The third lesson is rather difficult.(第三课相当难)/ Shall we read the text a third time?(我们把课文读第三遍,好吗？)
五、冠词
1、冠词分类及读法：
英语中冠词有不定冠词和定冠词两种,常放在名词的前面,用来限定名词的意义,起泛指或特指的作用。定冠词the读法：单独念时读[Ti:],在句子中常发[Ti ](元音之前)或者[T[](辅音之前)；
不定冠词a/an的读法：单独念时读 [ei ]/[An ]；在句子中常发
[[]/[[n]。
2、不定冠词a / an的用法：
不定冠词a / an用在单数名词的前面,a用在辅音开头的词前面; an用在元音开头的词的前面。
不定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示某一个人或东西,但不具体说明何人或何物。如：There is a dog lying on the ground.(有一只狗躺在地上。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物,以区别于其他种类。如：A elephant is much stronger than a man.(大象比人强壮多了。)(不能译为：一头大象比一个人强壮。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物中的任何一个。如：He is a teacher of English.(他是英语教师。)
(4) 表示?一?这个数量。如：There is a table and four chairs in that dining-room.(在那个餐厅里有一张桌子和四把椅子。)
(5) 几个用不定冠词的习语：a bit(一点), a little(一点), a few(几个), a lot (许多), a kind of(一种), a pair of(一副、一双), a number of(大量的), a piece of (一张、一片), half an hour(半小时), have a good time(玩得开心), have a cold(感冒), make a noise(发出嘈杂声), have/take a (rest等)(休息)一会儿,等等。
3、定冠词the的用法：定冠词the用在可数名词的单数或复数或不可数的名词前面。
定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示特指的人或事物。如：The man with a flower in his hand is Jack..(手上拿着一朵花的男人是杰克)
(2) 指谈话双方都熟悉的人或事物。如：Look at the blackboard,Lily.(莉莉,请看黑板。)
(3) 复述前面提到过的人或事物。如：There is a man under the tree. The man is called Robert.(树下有个人, 那个人叫罗伯特。)
(4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。如：The earth turns around the sun.(地球绕太阳旋转。)
(5) 用在表示方位的名词前面。如：There will be strong wind to the south of the Yangtze River.(长江以南地 区将会刮大风。)
(6) 在序数词和形容词最高级的前面。如：Who is the first one to go?(谁第一个去？) / Of all the stars, the sun is the nearest to the earth.(在所有的恒星之中太阳离地球最近)
(7) 常用在乐器名称的前面。如：He began to play the violin at the age of
5.(五岁时他开始拉小提琴)
(8) 用在江河、海洋、山脉等名称的前面。如：I have never been to the Himalaya Mountains.(我从来没有去过喜马拉雅山)
(9) 用在含有普通名词的专有名词的前面。如：He is from the United States of America.(他来自美利坚合众国)
(10)用在姓氏之前表示一家人。如：The Greens are going to Mount Emei next month.(下个月格林一家要去峨眉山)
(11)same之前一般用the。如：Lucy and Lily look the same.(露西和莉莉看上去长得一样)
(12)几个用定冠词的习语：at the same time (与此同时),make the bed(铺床),in the end(最后),all the time(一直),by the way(顺便说一下),on the way(在路上)等等。
4、一些不用冠词的情况：
(1) 专有名词和(第一次使用)一些不可数名词时前面通常不用。如：China is a very large country.(中国是个大国) / Man needs air and water.(人类需要空气和水)
(2) 名词前已有指示、物主或不定代词作定语时不用。如：My pen is much more expensive than yours.(我的钢笔比你的昂贵多了)
(3) 周名,月名或季节名前一般不用。如：He was born on Monday, February 18,1995.(他出生在19xx年二月十八日,星期一) / They usually plant trees on the hills in spring.(春天他们通常在山上植树)
(4) (第一次使用)复数名词表示人或事物的类别时不用。如：Men are cleverer than monkeys.(人比猴子聪明)
(5) 三餐饭前不用。如：We have breakfast at home and lunch at school.(我们在家吃早饭,在校吃午饭)
(6) 节、假日前一般不用。如：On Children’s Day the boys often get presents from their parents.(在儿童节,这些男孩经常得到父母的礼物)
(7) 球类名词前不用。如：The children play football on Saturday afternoons.(孩子们星期六下午踢足球)
(8) 城市的重要/主要建筑物名称前不用。如：They are now at People’s Cinema.(他们此刻在人民电影院)
(9) 一些习惯用语中不用。如：⑴ at / to / from / out of / after / for school; ⑵ in / to / for / after class; ⑶in / to / out of / into bed; ⑷ after / at/ from / out of / to work; ⑸ at / to sea; ⑹ in / from / down / to town; ⑺ at / from home; ⑻ at / for / to breakfast/lunch/supper; ⑼ at night/noon/midnight; ⑽ on foot; ⑾ go to school/bed; ⑿ on top of; ⒀ in front of; ⒁ on show/display/duty/watch; ⒂ in / out of hospital; ⒃ at all; ⒄ on/in time; ⒅ at first/last/once; ⒆ in Chinese/English,etc.; ⒇ take care of
六、形容词、副词：
1、形容词：用来说明或修饰名词、代词的词称为形容词。
1、形容词的句法作用：作句子中名词的定语、句子的表语以及宾语补足语。
2、形容词在句子中的位臵：
⑴作定语时放在名词的前面,且音节少的词放在音节多的词之前。如：a big yellow wooden wheel(一个黄色的大木轮)
⑵作表语时放在连系动词之后。如：The price sounds reasonable.(这个价格听起来算是合理)
⑶作宾语补足语时放在宾语之后。如：We must try our best to keep our environment clean.(我们必须尽力保持我们的环境清洁)
⑷后臵的情况：
⒈修饰复合不定代词时放在代词之后。如：Something serious has happened to him.(他发生了严重的事故)
⒉与表示?长、宽、高、重、老、远离?的词连用时形容词后臵。如：He’s 1.8 metres tall.(他身高1.8米。)The moon is about 380,000 kilometres away from the earth.(月球离地38万公里)
3、有关形容词的用法辨析：
⑴ whole与all：记住两个词序：⒈ the whole + 名词； ⒉all (of) the + 名词。如：He was busy the whole morning.(整个早晨他都很忙) / He can remember all the words he learns.(他能记住学过的所有单词)
⑵ tall与high, short与low：指人的个子时用tall与short；指其他事物时一般用high与low。如：He’s very tall/short.(他个子高/矮) / Tall trees are standing on both sides of that avenue.(大道的两侧有高大的树木) / A few people live on high mountains.(少量的人住在高山上)
⑶ real与true：real一般指东西的真假,译为?真的?；而true则指事情或消息的可靠性,译为?真实的?。如：This is a real diamond(钻石) and it’s very expensive.(这是货真价实的钻石,非常贵) / --Is that true?—Yes. I heard it with my own ears.(那真实吗？ 是的,我亲耳所听)
⑷ interested与interesting的区别：interesting指人或东西?有趣的?,作定语或表语,而interested则表示人对别的事物?感兴趣的?,只能作表语。如：The man is very interesting and all the children like him. (这个人很有趣,孩子们都喜欢他)/ This book is interesting and you can really enjoy yourself.(这本书很有趣,你会真正获得享受) / I am interested in science.(我对自然科学感兴趣)
⑸ such用法： such + a(n) + 名词(单数)(+that从句)。如：I have never seen such a foolish(愚蠢的) boy.(我从来没有见过这么蠢的男孩) / He had such a terrible accident that he could never forget it.(他遭遇了这么可怕的事故,他永远也不会忘记)
⑹ good与well：表示?好?时,作定语或表语用good,作状语用well；表示?(身体)好?时用well.如：Doing sports is good for us.(进行运动对我们有益) / Study well and make progress every day.(好好学习,天天向上) / --How are you?—I am very well.(你好吗？我很好。)
⑺ nice与fine：的区别：nice表示令人愉快的,可以指东西、人物外表等；fine一般指身体或天气好。如：Let’s go and share(分享) the nice cake.(我们去分享那块美味的蛋糕吧) / She is a nice girl.(他是个漂亮的姑娘) / What a fine day!(多好的天气！) /He’s fine recently(最近).(近来他身体不错) ⑻ too much与much too：too much表示?太多的?,修饰事物数量；much too表示?太过,过分?,修饰形容词或副词。如：I am full because I have had too much rice.(我饱了,因为我吃了太多的米饭) / That coat is much too dear.(那件大衣太贵了)
⑼ quick、fast与soon：quick与fast基本同义,quick往往指反应速度快,fast往往指运动速度快,而soon则表示时间上很快即将发生。如：After a quick breakfast, he hurried to school leaving his bag at home.(匆匆地吃过早饭,他朝学校赶去,却把书包忘记在家) / A train is much faster than a bus.(火车比公共汽车快得多) / His father will be back to China very soon.(他父亲很快就要返回中国)
⑽lonely与alone：lonely是表示心理活动的形容词,意思是：?孤独的,寂寞的?,作定语或表语；alone的意思是：?独自的,单独的?,指无人陪伴,仅作表语,(作为副词的alone可作状语)。如：He lives alone but he doesn’t feel lonely.(他一人独住,但是并不感到孤独)/ He is a lonely person. You can not easily get on well with him.(他是个孤独的人,你要和他相处好实在不易)
⑾ other与else的区别：两个词都可以作形容词,但是用法不同,other放在名词前；else修饰不定代词、疑问词、little、much,后臵,另外,or else表示?否则?,是连词。如：The other students are on the playground.(其他学生在
操场上) / Who else can work out this maths problem?(还有谁能解出着道数学题？) / This is nobody else’s money. It’s mine.(这不是别的什么人的钱,是我的。) / Do you have anything else to say for yourself?(你还有什么要为自己说的吗？
⑿ special与especial的区别：表示事件不同寻常、过分或特殊时,两个词可互换,但special较为常用。另外,special还可以表示特别的目的。如： She pays (e)special attention to clothes.(她非常注重着装) / These are special chairs for small children.(这些是专门给小孩子的椅子)
⒀ gone、lost、missing的区别：gone表示?丢了,没了?,含一去不复返的意思,也可以表示?死了?,作表语或宾补,不可以作定语；lost表示?丢失?,含难以找回的意思,可作定语、表语或宾补；missing表示?失踪了,不见了?,强调某人物不在原处,可作定语、表语或宾补。如：My fever(高烧) is gone, but I still have a cough.(发烧消退了,但我仍然咳嗽) / The parents found the lost child at last.(家长终于找到了迷路的孩子) / My dictionary is missing.Who’s taken it away?(我的字典不见了,谁拿走了？) / For more detailed information(详情) of the missing girls, please visit our website(网址).(如果想知道失踪女孩们的详情,请访问我们的网站)
⒁ living、alive、live、lively的区别：四个词都来源于动词live?生活、居住?。
living读[‘liviN]有三个意思：⒈?活着的、现存的?,作表语或定语,⒉?一模一样的、逼真的?,⒊相当于lively,意思是?强烈的、活泼的?； live读[laiv],指东西?活的?,可以替换为living；
alive读[[‘laiv]作表语,指人?活着的?,如果作定语,则放在名词的后面； lively读[‘laivli]有三个意思：⒈有生气的、活泼的、快活的,⒉(色彩)鲜艳的,⒊生动的、真实的。
例如：A living language should be learned orally(口头上).(活的语言应该从口头上学)(被动句) / We have a living hope that you will succeed.(我们强烈地希望你能成功) / Is she still alive?(她还活着吗？) / They are the happiest children alive.(他们是活着的最开心的孩子) / This is a live fish.(这是条活鱼) / A live wire(电线) is dangerous.(有电的电线是危险的) / She is as lively as a kitten(小猫).(她像小猫一样可爱) / He gave a lively description of the football match.(他生动地描述了那场足球赛)
⒂ sick与ill区别：sick和ill都表示?生病的?,但是,sick可以做定语、表语,而ill只能做表语。如：He has been ill/sick for a long time and he is very weak now.(他病了很久,现在非常虚弱) / Vets help treat sick pets and most of the pets’ owners like them.(兽医帮助诊治患病的宠物,很受宠物主人们的喜爱)
⒃ the poor(穷人们) / the rich(富人们)等用法：?the+形容词?这一结构可以表示一类人物,复数含义。如：We must try our best to help the poor.(我们应该尽力帮助穷人们) / The rich never know how the poor are living.(有钱人哪知穷人怎么过日子)
2、副词：用来说明事情发生的时间、地点、原因、方式等含义或说明其它形容词或副词程度的词叫做副词。
1、副词的分类：(见下表)
时 间 副 词 频度副词 地点/方位副词 程度副词 方式副词 疑问/连接副词 其他副词
today, tomorrow, once, here, there, very, too, well, how, too, also,
yesterday, now, twice, home, below, enough, hard, where, nor, so,
then, early, late, always, anywhere, rather, quite, alone, when, as, on,off,
once, soon, just, usually, above, outside, how, so, fast, why, either,
tonight, long, often, in, inside, out, much, just, together, whether yes, no,
already, yet, before, sometimes, back, up, down, nearly, only suddenly, however, etc. not, neither
ago, later, ever since never, away, off, far, almost, hardly, -ly结尾 关系副词 maybe,
after, whenever (seldom), near, nearby, as long as等, 的副词 where, perhaps,
first, someday, ever, wherever even, all, why, how certainly,
sometime, last, everywhere, a little, a bit when,
2、副词在句子中的位臵以及作用：
⑴作状语：
⒈ 时间副词：一般放在句首或句尾,注意,early、late、before、later、yet等一般放在句尾,already、just一般放在动词的前面。如：We will visit the Great Wall tomorrow.(我们明天要去参观长城) / They have already been to the UK twice.(他们去过英王国两次) / Soon the lost boy found his way back home.(不久迷路的孩子找到了回家的路)
⒉ 频度副词：一般放在be动词之后或者助动词与主要动词之间,但sometimes、often等还可以放在句首或句尾,usually可放在句首,once可放在句尾,twice、three times等一般放在句尾。如：Sometimes I get up early.(我有时起得早)/ The workers usually have lunch at the factory.(工人们通常在厂里吃午饭) / Take this medicine twice a day.(这种药一天吃两次)
⒊ 方式副词：一般放在行为动之后,suddenly可以放在句首、句尾或动词之前。如：Old people can hardly walk as quickly as young people.(老年人几乎不可能走得和年轻人一样快) / Suddenly he saw a light in the dark cave(山洞).(突然,在黑黢黢的山洞里,他看见了一丝亮光)
⒋ 地点副词：一般放在句尾,但here、there还可放在句首。如：There you can see thousands of bikes running in all directions(方向).(在那里,你可以看到成千上万的自行车朝各个方向流动) / The frightened wolf ran away.(受到惊吓的狼逃开了)/ He walked out quietly and turned back soon.(他悄悄地走了出去,很快又返回)
⒌ 程度副词：修饰动词时,放在动词之前；修饰形容词或副词时,放在形容词或副词之前。但注意,enough总是放在被修饰的形容词或动词的后面；only位臵比
较灵活,总是放在被修饰的词的前面。如：I nearly forgot all about it if he did not tell me again.(如果他不再次告诉我,我几乎把那事全忘了) / It was so strange that I could hardly believe my ears.(它那么奇怪一直我都不能相信我的耳朵) / She got to the station early enough to catch the first bus.(她早早地赶到车站赶上了首班车)
⒍ 疑问副词：用于对句子的状语进行提问,位臵总是在句首。如：When and where were you born?(你何时何地出生？)/ Why did little Edison sit on some eggs?(小爱迪生为什么要坐在鸡蛋上？)/ How do you do?(你好！)
⒎ 连接副词：用来引导主语从句、宾语从句和表语从句,在从句中作状语。How I am going to kill the cat is still a question.(我打算怎样杀死那只猫还是个问题)/ That is why everyone is afraid of the tiger.(那就是人人都害怕老虎的原因) / He wondered how he could do it the next day.(他不知道第二天怎样做那事)
⒏ 关系副词：用来引导定语从句,在从句中作状语。如：This is the place where Mr Zhang once lived.(这就是张先生曾经住过的地方)/ Please tell me the way how you have learned English so well.(请告诉我你的英语是怎样学得这么好的方法)
⒐ 其它副词：too?也?,用在句尾；also放在动词前；either ?也不?,放在句尾；nor?也不?,放在句首；so?如此,这样?,放在形容词、副词前；on/off?开/关?放在动词之后；not放在be之后、助动词之后、不定式或动名词之前；maybe/perhaps放在句首；certainly放在句首或动词之前。如：He went to the Palace Museum and I went there,too.(他去了故宫博物院,我也去了) / Maybe your ticket is in your inside pocket.(也许你的票就在你的里边衣袋里) / --Tom doesn’t have a computer. –Nor do I.(汤姆没有计算机,我也没有。)
(2)作表语：地点副词一般可以作表语,放在be等连系动词之后,说明人物所处的位臵。如：I’m very sorry he isn’t in at the moment.(很抱歉,他此刻不在家)/ I have been away from my hometown for nearly 20 years.(我离开家乡有将近20年了) / Jim is over there.(吉姆就在那边)
(3)作定语：时间副词(如now、then)以及许多地点副词都可以作名词的定语,放在名词的后面。如：People now often have their festival dinners at restaurants.(现在的人们经常在餐馆里吃节日晚宴) / Women there were living a terrible life in the 1920s.(在二十世纪20年代那儿的女人过着可怕的日子)
(4)作宾语补足语：地点副词一般可以作宾语补足语。如：Put your dirty socks away, Jim! They are giving out bad smell!(吉姆,把你的脏袜子拿开！它们在散发着臭气。) / Father kept him in and doing his lessons.(父亲把他关在家里做作业)
[注意] ?动词+副词?的宾语如果是代词,则该副词应该放在代词之后。如：He wrote down the word.(他写下了那个词。)→He wrote it down.(他把它写了下来。)
3、有关副词的重要注释：
⑴ as…as…常构成一些词组：as soon as…(一旦…就…), as well as…(同样), as+形容词/副词+as possible(尽可能……地)。如：Please ring me up as soon as you get to Beijing.(请你一到北京就给我写信。)/ Miss Gao hurried to the
school gate as quickly as possible.(高小姐尽快地赶到了校门口。)
[注释] ?as long / much as + 名词?可以表示?长达/多达…?的含义。如：The house costs as much as five hundred thousand yuan.(那幢房子花费高达50万元。)/ They stayed in the cave(山洞)as long as two weeks.(他们呆在山洞里长达两周。)
⑵ later、after、ago、before的用法：⒈?一段时间+later/ago?分别表示?(多久)以后/以前?,主要用于过去时态。⒉?after/before+某个时刻?分别表示?在某时刻之后/之前?,此时两个词是介词。⒊ago与before：ago只能用于过去时,before用于完成时。如：He had an accident a week ago.(一周前出了一个事故)/ Some years later, the boy became a very famous singer.(数年后这个男孩成了著名的歌唱家)/ Have you been there before?(你从前到过那儿吗？)/ After a few years he gave up smoking.(过了几年他戒了烟。) ⑶ above、below、over、under的用法：在上下方用above和below,在高低处用over和under.如：The stars are high above in the sky.(星星高挂在空中) / A plane flew over quickly.(一架飞机从头顶飞过。)
当above、below、over、under是介词性质时,意义相似。
⑷ too、also、either、nor的用法：too(?也?)用于肯定句和疑问句的末尾,且用逗号隔开；also(?也?)用于肯定句句子谓语动词之前；either(?也?)用于否定句末尾,也用逗号隔开；nor(?也不?)用于倒装句句首；如：Are you American,too?(你也是美国人吗？)/ He is not happy and I am not happy, either.(他不愉快,我也不。) / He didn’t watch the football game. Nor did I.(他没有看足球赛,我也没有。)/ You can also find the market is very good.(你还可以发觉那个市场很好。)
⑸ enough、too、so、very、quite、very much的用法： enough (?足够,十分?)放在形容词或副词之后；too(?太?)、very(?非常?)、quite(?相当?)、so(?如此地?)等放在形容词或副词之前,very much(?非常?)放在动词之后。如：It’s too/so/very/quite expensive.(它太贵/那么贵/非常贵/相当贵。)/ I don’t like sweets very much.(我不很喜欢糖果)
[注意] very与 much的区别：very修饰形容词、副词的原级和现在分词形容词,much修饰形容词和副词的比较级；much还可以修饰疑问句和否定句中的动词,very不可以。如：He is very stupid.(他很笨)/ The film was very moving and everyone swept.(电影非常动人,大家都哭了)/ You must work much harder or you will fail to enter the good school.(你得学习更努力,不然你考不进那所好学校)/ I don’t like him much.(我不太喜欢他)
⑹ sometimes、 sometime、 some times 、some time的用法：sometimes(有时)用于一般现在时、 sometime(在将来某时)用于将来时、 some times(数次)表示次数、some time(一些时间)表示一段时间。如：Sometimes they go hiking in the mountains.(他们有时徒步旅行到山里去)/ I will stay here some time.(我会在这儿呆些时候的。)/ I will meet your father sometime.(我什么时候要见见你的父亲。)
⑺ how、what用于感叹句的用法：对句子中的形容词或副词感叹时用how,对人或事物(可能含有形容词作修饰语)进行感叹用what. 如：What a fine day (it is) today!(今天天气真好！) / How difficult (the problem is)!((问题)真难呀！)
⑻ already、yet的用法：在完成时中,already一般用于肯定句,yet一般用于否定句和疑问句。如：Have you done it already?(你已经做好了？) / I have not had my breakfast yet.(我还没有吃早饭呢。)
⑼ hard与hardly的用法：hard作为副词意思是：?努力地,猛烈地?,hardly是否定词,意思是：?几乎不?,一般与情态动词can/could连用。如：They study English very hard.(他们英语学得很刻苦)/ You can hardly see a person spit in a public place.(在公共场所你几乎看不到一个人随地吐痰)
⑽ like...very much、like...better(=prefer)、like...best的用法：三个短语分别表示?非常喜欢?、?更喜欢?、?最喜欢?。如：I like baseball very much.(我非常喜欢棒球)/ Do you like butter better than cheese?( / They like hamburgers best.
⑾?quite/what+a+形容词+名词?的用法：记住：⒈quite/such/what...+a+形容词+名词;⒉too/so/how+形容词+a+名词;⒊rather+a+形容词+名词 = a+ rather+形容词+名词。如：I have never seen such a strange guy(家伙).(我从未见过这样奇怪的家伙) / It is quite a nice day for a walk.(这真是散步的好日子)
⑿ how 的几个短语：how often?多常,每隔多久?,用于一般时态,对表示频度的词语进行提问； how soon?多久以后?,用于将来时态； how long?多久?,用于过去时、完成时或其他时态； how many times?多少次?,用于过去时或完成时,对总计次数进行提问； how much?多么,多少?,对程度进行提问,也可以对数量(不可数)或金钱进行提问。如：How long have you been like this?(你这样已经多久了？)/ How often does he wash his face?(他每隔多久洗一次脸？)
⒀ much、more与most的用法：这三个词除了是形容词作名词的修饰语之外,还是程度副词,much表示?很?,修饰原级形/副,more表示?更?用来构成多音节形/副的比较级,most表示?最?用来构成多音节形/副的最高级。此外,much也可以修饰比较级形/副。如：This park is much more beautiful than that one.(这个公园比那个漂亮多了)/ It is the most instructive film I have ever seen.(这是我看过的最有教育意义的电影)
⒁ no more、no longer、not...any more、no...any longer的用法：表示时间,可以用no longer、not...ny more、no...any longer,而且no longer只能放在谓语动词之前；表示程度,可以用no more、not...any more.如：He no longer lived there.(他不再住在那里) / Tom wanted no more cakes.(他不想再要蛋糕) / He didn’ t smoke any more/longer.(他不再抽烟)
⒂ 被动语态中,方式副词一般放在be与谓语动词之间。如： The runner was badly hurt.(赛跑运动员受了重伤) / English is widely spoken in the world today.(如今世界上英语说得很广泛)
⒃ too...to...与so...that...的问题：副词too/so后面跟形容词或副词,to后面跟动词,that后面跟从句。Too...to... (?太.……以致不……?)是否定的结构,用于简单句；so...that...(?如此…以致…?)是肯定结构,用于复合句。如：The child is too young to join the army.(这孩子年龄太小还不能参军)/ He is so strong that he can lift the heavy box.(他这么强壮,搬得动那个重箱子。)
⒄ 既是形容词也是副词的单词有：early, late, long, last, next, first, near,
enough, much, all, hard, alone, fast, slow, high, low, straight等等。如：It was a long holiday.(那是个长假)/ He stayed there very long.(他在那儿呆了好久)/ Think hard then you will find a way.(好好想你就会找到办法)/ He is a very hard(难对付的) person.(他是个难玩的家伙)
⒅ farther与further的用法区别：表示地点、方向或距离时两个词同义,意思为?更远、较远?,但是further还表示?更多、进一步、额外?等意思,此时不能换为farther. 如：They decided to go farther/further the next day.(他们决定第二天走得再远些)/ This problem will be further discussed.(这个问题还要进一步讨论)/ Every one of them had their further studies after they left college.(他们每个人大学毕业后继续进修)
⒆ rather与quite的用法区别：同very一样,两个词都表示形容词或副词的程度,quite表示?不到最高程度但是比预料的好?,rather比quite更接近very的含义,含有令人惊讶的意思。见下图对?nice?程度的描绘：
not nice (fairly) nice quite nice rather nice very nice
如：It’s quite a nice film.(这是部好片子)。(可能意味着不是一部最好的电影) / It’s rather a nice film.(这是部很不错的电影。)(意味着比大多数电影都好)
[注意]注意quite与rather后面的次序词序。
⒇ maybe、possibly、perhaps的区别：maybe?可能、也许?,比另外两个词更不正式、更随便、可能性不大；possibly?可能地、或者、也许?,可能性较大,在否定句和疑问句中表示?无论如何?；perhaps?可能?,较为常用而且正式,可能性也不大。如：You could put it over there,maybe.(也许你可以把它放在那边) / I couldn’t possibly have finished such a long book in such a short time.(我不可能在这么短的时间内完成这么长的一本书)/ I thought perhaps it was the letter you have been expecting.(我以为那也许就是你期盼的信件)
(21) most、mostly的区别：most作为形容词和名词时意思是?大多数的、大部分的?,作为副词时意思为?最,十分、很?；mostly仅为副词,意思为?主要地、多半地、大部分地?。如：I was at home most of the time when I was free.(我有空时大部分时间都在家)Most children are naughty.(大部分的孩子都淘气)/ This is the most exciting part of the film.(这是电影中最令人兴奋的部分)/She is mostly out on Sundays.(星期天她一般不在家)
(22) (be) worth、(be) worthy of的区别：worth一般被看作是介词,后面接名词或者动名词,用主动表示被动含义,还可以用副词well修饰；worthy of表示?值得的、配得上的?,后面跟动名词的被动形式。如：What is worth doing at all is worth doing well(凡是值得做的,就值得好好去做). / The house is worth ￥300,000.(房子价值30万元)/ This book is well worth reading several times.(这本书值得好好读几遍)/ It is a thing worthy of being seen.(这是一个值得看的东西)
(23)almost、nearly的区别：两个词意思相近,都表示?几乎、将近?,大多数情况下可以互换,与否定词连用时用almost不用nearly. almost no 相当于hardly any(几乎没有)。如：He had done almost nothing today.(他今天几乎
没有干什么) / We are almost/nearly there.(我们几乎就到那里了)/ Almost nobody/Hardly anybody understood his words.(几乎没有人懂他的话)
(24) a bit与a little的区别：这两个名词短语经常当作副词使用,修饰形容词或副词的原级或比较级,可以互换,语气比rather弱。如：This digital camera is a bit(a little) expensive.(这台数码相机有点贵)/ It is a little(a bit) colder than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷了点)
另外,a little可以直接加不可数名词,a bit 则采用?a bit + of +名词(不可数或可数名词复数)?的形式。如：I have got a bit of a cold.(我有点感冒)/ Go and get a little water for me, please.(请你去给我搞点水来)
[注意] not a bit(=not at all)意为?根本不?,而 not a little则意为?非常,不是一点?。
3、形容词、 副词的原级、比较级和最高级
1、分类：形容词和副词有原级、比较级和最高级三级。
原级变为比较级和最高级有规则变化和不规则变化两种。
2、规则变化:
(1)单音节和部分双音节形容词和副词,在原级的后面加上er,est构成比较级和最高级。
a)直接加er,est ：
b)以重读闭音节结尾的,要双写最后一个辅音字母,后加er,est：
c)以辅音字母+y结尾的,先把y改为i再加上er,est：
(2)两个音节或两个以上的音节的,在原级前加more / most.
3、不规则变化:
原级 比较级 最高级
good好的 better更好的 best最好的
well好；(身体)好的,
bad,badly糟糕的,糟糕地 worse更糟糕的,更糟糕地；(身体)更不舒服的 worst最糟糕的,最糟糕地；(身体)最不舒服的
ill(身体)不舒服的
many许多的(可数) more更多的；更 most最多的；最
much许多的(不可数)；非常
little少的 less更少的 least最少的
far远的；远地 farther更远的；更远地 farthest最远的；最远地 further进一步的(地) furthest最深刻的(地)
4、形容词和副词的原级、比较级和最高级的用法：
(1)讲述某人/物自身的情况时,用原级。基本句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 + (very/too/so/quite/rather…) + 形容词/副词原级 +….
如：He is very old now.(他现在很老了) / They ran quite fast.(它们跑得相当快) / The weather looks rather bad.(天气看上去相当糟) / I am so happy!(我是如此的快乐)
☆表示两者之间没有差别时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词 + as + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物 +….
如：He is as excited as his younger sister.(他和他妹妹一样兴
奋)/ Lily rode her bike as slowly as an old lady.(莉莉骑车像老太太一样慢)/ They picked as many apples as the farmers (did).(他们摘的苹果和农民一样多)
☆表示第一个人比不上第二个人时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词(否定式) + as / so + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物+….
如：He is not so / as excited as his younger sister.(他没他妹妹那么兴奋) / Lily did not ride her bike so / as slowly as an old lady. (莉莉骑车不像老太太那样慢) / They didn’t pick so / as many apples as the farmers (did). (他们摘的苹果不如农民多)
(2) 讲述两者有差异,第一个人物超过第二个人物时,用比较级。基本句型： 主语(‘A’)+谓语动词+(much/a little/even/still)+形容词/副词比较级+than+第二个人物(‘B’)+….
如：A modern train is much faster than a car.(现代的火车比轿车快多了) / This book didn’t cost me more than that one.(这本书花费我的钱不比那本多)
讲述两者有差异,第一个人物不及第二个人物时,用比较级。句型是： 主语(‘A’) + 谓语动词 + less+ (多音节形/副)比较级 + than + 第二个人物(‘B’) +….
如：I think English is less difficult than maths.(我认为英语不比数学难)/ Do you think it less important to learn a foreign language?(你认为学外语不那么重要吗？)
(3)讲述某人/物是一群之中最突出的一个时,用最高级。句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 +(the) +形容词/副词最高级 +in / of …. 如：The Changjiang River is the longest in China.(长江是中国最长的河流) / He jumped (the) highest of the three (boys).(三个男生中他跳得最高)
4、关于比较等级的重要注释：
1、以上六个句型中,如果动词是及物或不及物动词,则后面用副词；如果后面是连系动词,则后面用形容词。如：This car is the fastest of the four.(形容词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中最快的)/ This car runs (the) fastest of the four.(副词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中跑得最快的)
2、?比较级+and+比较级?表示?越来越……?。如：The weather is getting warmer and warmer.(天越来越温暖了)
3、?the+比较级…,the+比较级…?表示?越…就越…?。如：The more trees we plant,the better it will be.(我们栽的树越多,情况就会越好)/ The harder you try,the greater your progress is.(你越是努力,进步就越大)
4、一般的形容词或副词的比较级前面可以加much/a little/even/still,而表示数量的more之前还可以加some/ any/ no/ one/ two/ many/ several/ a lot等词。如：It is much colder today than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷多了)/ Would you like some more coffee?(你还要些咖啡吗？)/He did not eat any more.(他没有再吃)
5、more than / less than分别可以理解为?多于/少于?,相当于副词,more than=over; less than=under.如：I lived in New York for more than four
months.(我在纽约生活了四个多月)
6、?one of the +最高级+名词(复数)?整个短语为单数含义,谓语要用单数形式。如：One of the oldest houses has been burnt in a fire.(最古老的一幢房子在一场大火中被烧毁了)
7、?Which / Who+动词+形/副,□,□or□??句型中,如果有两个选项,形/副用比较级,如果有三个选项,形/副用最高级。如：Who has more books, Lin Tao or Han Mei?(林涛和韩梅谁的书最多？)/ Which is the heaviest,a pig,a horse or an elephant?(猪、马、象哪个最重？)
8、上下文中含有both/either/neither/two/twins等表示两个事物的词时,用比较级,而且往往还要加the；含有all/none/no one/ every 等表示三个或三个以上事物时,用最高级。如： --Do you like the smaller one?—Neither.(小一点的那个你喜欢吗？一个都不喜欢)/ --Which do you like best? –All of them!(你最喜欢哪个？全部。)
七、介词：
1、介词的主要用法：
介词是一种虚词,不能独立使用。介词之后一般有名词或代词(宾格)或相当于名词的其他词类、短语或从句作它的宾语,即构成介词短语。有些介词是由两个以上的词构成的短语介词,如：out of(从…中出来), because of(因为), away from(距离…), on top of(在…顶上), ever since(自从…), next to(在…隔壁), according to(根据…), in front of(在…前方)等。
2、介词的分类表： (见下表)
地点(位臵、范围)介词：above在…前, about在…附近, across在…对面, after在…后面, against倚着..., along在…近旁, among在…中间, around在…周围, round在….周围, at在…处, before在...前, behind在...后, below低于..., beside在...旁边, between在...之间, by在...旁, down在...下面, from来自..., in在...里面, inside在...里面, near靠近..., of在...之中, on在...上面, out of在...之外, outside在....外面, over在....上方, under在...下方, up在...上面, on top of在...顶部, in front of在...前, close to靠近..., in the middle of在...的中间, at the end of在...的末端,等等。
方向(目标趋向)介词：across横越..., against对抗..., along沿着..., around绕着..., round环绕..., at朝着..., behind向…后面, etween…and…从…到...,by路过/通过..., down向…下, for向..., from从/离..., in进入..., into进入..., inside到...里面, near接近..., off脱离/除..., on向...上, out of向...外, outside向....外, over跨过..., past经过/超过..., through穿过..., to向/朝..., towards朝着..., on to到...上面, onto到...上面, up向...上, away from远离...
时间介词：about大约..., after在…以后, at在… (时刻), before在…以前, by到…为止, during在…期间, for有…(之久), from从…(时)起, in在(上/下午);在(多久)以后, on在(某日), past过了…(时), since自从…(至今), through 贯穿…(期间), till直到…时, until直到…时, to到(下一时刻), ever since从那时起至今,at the beginning of在...开始时 ,at the end of在...末 , in the middle of在...当中 ,at the time of在...时
方式介词：as作为/当作..., by用/由/乘坐/被..., in用…(语言), like
与…一样, on骑(车)/徒(步),通过(收音机/电视机), over通过(收音机), through通过..., with用(材料),用(手/脚/耳/眼), without没有…
涉及介词: about关于..., except除了…, besides除了…还... for对于/就…而言, in在…(方面), of…的,有关..., on关于/有关..., to对…而言, towards针对..., with就…而言
其它介词:
【目的介词】 for为了..., from防止…, to为了…
【原因介词】 for因为..., with由于…, because of因为...
【比较介词】 as与…一样,like象…一样,than比...,to与…相比, unlike与…不同
【伴随/状态介词】 against和…一起(比赛),at在(上班/休息/上学/家,etc.),in穿着…(衣服/颜色),into变成...,on在(值日), with与…一起,有/带着/长着..., without没有/无/不与…一起
3、介词短语的句法作用：
介词短语相当于一个形容词或副词,可用作状语、定语和表语。如：The man came <down the stairs>.(状)(那个人走下楼来)/The woman <with a flower on her head> is from the countryside.(定)(头上戴花的妇女来自乡下)/The teacher is now with the pupils.(表)(老师现在和学生在一起)
4、介词短语在句子中的位臵：
介词短语做状语时,如果表示时间/地点,可以放在句首或句尾,如果表示方向/方式/伴随/涉及/原因/目的/比较,一般放在句尾； 介词短语作表语时放在连系动词之后；介词短语作定语时,只能放在被修饰的名词之后。如：He wanted to find a good job in Shanghai the next year.(状语)(他想来年在上海找份好工作)/ They searched the room for the thief.(他们在房间里搜索小偷) / The letters are for you.(表语)(信是给你的)/ Have you seen a cat with a black head and four white legs?(定语)(你看见一只黑头白腿的猫了吗？)
5、重要注释：
⑴ this / that / these / those / last / next / a / every / each等词构成的时间短语,前面不用任何介词。如：Every year travellers from abroad come to visit Pingyao.(每年都有国外的游客来游览平窑镇)/ He had a bad cold that week.(那个星期他患重感冒)
⑵ for有时用来引出动词不定式的逻辑主语,常翻译成?对于…而言?。如：It’s too hard for me to finish the work in only one hour.(让我在区区一个小时内完成这项工作太难了)/ The house is big enough for 10 men to live in.(房子够大的可以容10个人住)
⑶ of有时用来表示后面的人物正好是前面的表语的逻辑主语。如：It’s very nice/kind of you to do so.(你这么做真是太好了)
⑷ 介词有时会与它的宾语分离,而且宾语前臵。
⒈ 当宾语是疑问词时。Who are you talking about?(你们在谈论谁？)
⒉ 宾语在从句中当连接词时。He has a younger brother who he must take good care of.(他有 一个需要他照顾的小弟。) / Do you know who our teacher is talking with over there?(你知道我们的老师在那边和什么人谈话吗？) ⒊ 动词不定式作定语且该动词为不及物动词,后面有介词。I finally found a chair to sit on.(我 最终找到了一张椅子坐。)
(5) 记住一些固定词组：arrive at/in(到达…),on foot(步行),not…at all(根本不),to the north of(在…以北),in the east of(在…的东部),in the night(在夜间),at night(在晚上),be afraid of(害怕…),be full of(充满/ 装满….),be filled with(充满/ 装满….),be good/bad for(对…有益/有害),be made of(由…做成),be made from(由…制造),play with(玩耍……),look out of(朝…外面看),at the end of(在…末梢/结束时),by the end of(不迟于…/到…末为止),with the help of或with one’s help(在…的帮助下),look after(照料…),look for(寻找…),on a bike(=by bike)骑车, help sb. with(帮某人做…),get on (well) with(与某人相处[融洽]),等等。
6、某些介词的用法辨析：
⑴ 时间或地点介词in、on、at的用法区别：表示时间时, in表示在一段时间里(在将来时句子中则表示在一段时间之后), on表示在具体的某一天或者某天的上下午等, at表示在某个时刻或者瞬间； 表示地点时, in表示在某个范围之内, on表示在某个平面上或与一个面相接触,at则表示在某个具体的场所或地点。如：He was born on the morning of May 10th.(他出生于五月十日的早晨)/ I usually get up at 7：00 in the morning.(我通常在早上的七点钟起床) / His glasses are right on his nose.(他的眼镜就架在他的鼻子上)/ He is at the cinema at the moment.(此刻他正在电影院)
⑵ after与in表示时间的用法区别：?after+(具体时刻/从句)?表示?在…时刻之后?常用于一般时态；?in+(一段时间)?表示?在(多久)之后?,常用于将来时态。如：He said that he would be here after 6：00.(他说他六点钟之后会来这儿)/ My father is coming back from England in about a month.(我父亲大约一个月以后从英国回来)
⑶ since与for表示时间的用法区别：?since+(具体时刻/that-从句)?表示?自从…起一直到现在?,?for +(一段斶间)?表示?总共有…之久?,都常用于完成时态；如：Uncle Li has worked in this factory since 1970.(李叔叔自从19xx年起就在这家工厂工作了)/ Uncle Li has worked in this factory for over 30 years. (李叔叔在这家工厂已经工作了30多年)
⑷ by、in与with表示方式的用法区别：都可以表示?工具、手段?,但是by主要表示?乘坐?某个交通工具或?以……方式?,在被动句中可以表示动作的执行者；in表示?使用?某种语言/文字,with表示?使用?某个具体的工具、手段。如：We see with our eyes and walk with our feet.(我们用眼睛看东西,用双脚走路)/ Please write that article(文章) in English.(请你用英语写那篇文章)/ Let’s go to the zoo by taxi.(我们打的去动物园吧。)/ It was written by Lao She.(那是老舍写的)
⑸ about与on的用法区别：都可以表示?有关…?,但是about的意义比较广,而on主要表示?有关…(专题/课程)?。如：Tom is going to give a talk on the history of America.(汤姆要作一个美国历史的报告)/ They are very excited talking about the coming field trip.(他们兴致勃勃地谈论着即将来到的野外旅游)
⑹ through与across、over的用法区别： through指?穿过…(门洞/人群/树林)?； across和over可以指?跨越…(街道/河流)?,可互换,但是表示?翻过…?时只能用over. 如：Just then a rat (鼠)ran across the road.(就在那时一只老鼠跑过路面)/ There is a bridge across/over the river.(河上有座桥)/
They climbed over the mountain and arrived there ahead of time.(他们翻过大山提前到达了那里)/ The visitors went through a big gate into another park.(参观者们穿过一个大门来到另一个公园)
(7)as与like的区别：两个词都表示?像……?,但是as译为?作为……?,表示的是职业、职务、作用等事实,而like译为?像……一样?,表示外表,不是事实。如：Let me speak to you as a father.(我以父亲的身份和你讲话。)(说话者是听者的父亲) / Let me speak to you like a father.(让我像一位父亲一样和你讲话)(说话者不是听者的父亲)
(8)at the end of、by the end of、to the end、in the end的用法区别：at the end of…既可以表示时间也可以表示地点,译为?在…末；在…尽头?,常与过去时连用；by the end of…只能表示时间,译为?在…前；到…为止?,常用于过去完成时； in the end与at last基本等义,表示?终于、最后?,通常用于过去时；to the end译为?到…的终点为止?,前面往往有表示运动或连续性的动词。如：By the end of last term we had learned 16 units of Book III.(到上学期期末我们已经学习了第三册16个单元)/ At the end of the road you can find a big white house with brown windows.(在路的尽头你能找到一幢有棕色窗户的白房子)/ They left for Beijing at the end of last week.(上周末他们动身去了北京)/ In the end he succeeded in the final exams.(他最终在期末考试中考及格了)/ We should go on with the work to the end.(我们应该把工作干到底)/ Follow this road to the end and you will see a post office.(沿这条路走到底就能看见一家邮电局)
(9)for a moment、for the moment、in a moment、at the moment的区别：for a moment?一会儿、片刻?(=for a while),常与持续性动词连用；for the moment?暂时、目前?,常用于现在时；in a moment?一会儿、立即、马上?(=soon; in a few minutes),一般用于将来时；at the moment?此刻,眼下?(=now),用于现在进行时。如：Please wait for a moment.(请稍等)/ Let’s leave things as they are for the moment.(暂时就维持现状吧！) / I’ll come back in a moment.(我过会儿回来)/ I am very busy at the moment.(眼下我很忙)
(10)but的问题：用介词but引出另一个动词时,要注意：如果前面有do,后面就用原形动词,前面没有do时,后面的动词要加to。如：I could do nothing but wait.(我什么也做不了只能等) / They had no choice(选择) but to fight.(他们没有选择只有战斗)
(11)in front of 与in the front of： in front of?在…的前面?, 与in the front of?在…的前部?。如：A car was parking in front of the hall.(大厅跟前停着一辆汽车)/ In the front of the hall stood a big desk.(大厅前部立着一个大讲台)
(12)except与besides的区别：except?除了?,表示排除掉某人物,即不包含；而besides?除了?则表示包含,即?不仅……又……?。如：Everyone went to the Palace Museum except Tom.(除了Tom,大家都去了故宫博物院)(Tom没有去故宫)/ Besides Chinese he also studied many other subjects.(除了汉语之外,他还学其他许多功课)(?汉语?也是他学的功课之一)
八、动词
1、动词的分类：
类 别 意 义 例 句
实义动词 含有实在的意义,表示动作或状态,在句子中能独立作谓语。 She has some bananas. 她吃些香蕉。
They eat a lot of potatoes. 他们常吃土豆。
I’m reading an English book now.
我现在正看一本英文书。
连系动词 本身有一定的词义,但不能独立作谓语,必须和表语一起构成谓语。 His father is a teacher.他父亲是教师。
Twins usually look the same.
双胞胎通常看起来一样。
The teacher became very angry. 老师变得很生气。
助动词 本身没有词义,不能独立作谓语,只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,用来表示否定、疑问、时态、语态或其它语法形式,助动词自身有人称、单复数和时态的变化。 He doesn’t speak English. 他不说英语。
We are playing basketball. 我们在打篮球。
Do you have a brother? 你有兄弟吗？
情态动词 本身有一定的意义,不能独立作谓语,只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,表示说话人的语气和情态。情态动词没有人称和单复数的变化,有些情态动词有过去式。 You can keep the books for two weeks.
这些书你可以借两个星期。
May I smoke here? 我可以在这儿抽烟吗？
We must go now. 我们现在得走了。
★重要注解：
(1) 关于实义动词：
⒈ 英语的实义动词又可分为及物动词和不及物动词两大类：
后面必须跟宾语意义才完整的叫及物动词；本身意义完整,后面不需跟宾语的叫不及物动词。
⒉ 有些动词通常只作不及物动词。如：go,come,happen,lie,listen,rise,arrive,hall等。
有些动词通常用作及物动词。如：say, raise, lay, find, buy等。 ⒊ 大多数动词可以兼作及物动词和不及物动词。如：study, sing等。
⒋ 有些动词作及物动词与作不及物动词时的意义有所不同。如：know, wash等。 ⒌ 有些动词常和介词 、副词或其它词类一起构成固定词组,形成短语动词。如：listen,reply,wait,look.
(2) 关于连系动词：
⒈ 连系动词用来连接主语和表语,连系动词后面常为形容词。
⒉ 常见的连系动词有：be、become、look、feel、sound、smell、taste、seem、turn、grow、get、 go、fall、sit、stand、lie 等。
⒊ 有些连系动词来源于实义动词,意思也跟着变化：look(看→看起来)、feel(感觉、摸→感到)、 smell(闻、嗅→闻起来)、taste(尝→尝起来)、turn(翻转、转动→变得)、grow(生长→变得)、get(得到、到达→变得)、go(去→变得),所不同的是,作为实义动词时,后面不能跟形容词。
[注释]
become、get、go、be、grow、turn的用法区别：become表示?变成?,比较正式,通常不用将来时表示动作已经完成。get也表示动作已经完成,但是更加口语
化,通常表示温度、时间、岁数等变化。go表示?变得?,常见于某些短语中,后面常有形容词bad、blind、hungry等。be表示?是、成为、当?,多用于将来时、祈使句或不定式中。grow表示?变得?,常指逐渐的变化,表示身高、岁数的增长。turn表示?变得?,指变为与原先不同的情况,通常指颜色等变化。如：I was caught in the rain and I became ill.(我淋雨感冒了)/ He has got rich.(他变富了)/ He will be a scientist in the future.(将来他将成为科学家)/ My little brother has grown much taller in the past year.(在过去的一年里我的弟弟长得高多了)/ The sandwich has gone bad.(那块三明治已经变坏)/ Her face turned red after her mother criticized(批评) her.(妈妈批评了他以后他的脸变红了)
(3) 关于助动词：
⒈常见的助动词有：用于进行时和被动语态的be (am, is, are ,was, were, been, being ) ;用于完成时的have(has,had,having) ;用于将来时的shall (should) ; will (would)和用于一般时的do(does,did) .
⒉助动词必须同主语的人称和数一致,也就是说因主语人称、数的不同而采用不同的形式,其中有些助动词也可作情态动词。如：shall, will, should, would.
(4) 关于情态动词：
⒈常见的情态动词有：can (could) ,may (might), must ,shall (should), will (would), dare (dared) , need等,另外,have to、had better也当作情态动词使用。情态动词后面必须加动词的原形。
⒉can表示体力、脑力方面的能力或客观的可能性。口语中, 在询问或说明一件事可不可以做时,常用?can?代替?may?。情态动词?can?的过去式是?could?,否定式是?cannot?通常缩写成?can’t?,?could?的否定式是?could not?,通常缩写成?couldn’t?。如：Can I help you?(要帮忙吗？)/ He can swim.(他会游泳)/ That can’t be Mr Li.(那不可能是李先生)
⒊ may表示允许、请求或可能性,用may提问时,肯定回答一般用Certainly或Yes,you may.;否定回答一般用can’t或mustn’t. 如：May I ask you a question?—Certainly.(可以问你一个问题吗？当然可以)/ You may go now.(现在你可以走了)/ It may be in your pocket.(它可能在你的衣袋里)
⒋ must表示?必须?、?一定?的意思。表示?必须?时否定形式是mustn’t；表示?一定?时,否定形式是?can’t? 如：We must be very careful when we cross the road.(我们过马路时一定要非常小心)/ It must be Jack.(那准是杰克)/ I haven’t seen Kate today. She can’t be here.(我今天没有看到过凯特,她不可能在这里)
[注意]用must(必须)进行提问时,肯定回答用must,否定回答用needn’t；用must(一定)进行提问时,肯定回答仍用must,但是否定回答用can’t.如：Must we clean the room before we leave? –Yes,you must.或No,you needn’t.(我们走之前必须要打扫房间吗？是的,必须打扫。/ 不,不需要。) / Must she be in the romm? –Yes,she must.或No,she can’t.(她一定在房间里吗？是的,一定。/ 不,不可能在。)
⒌ ?have to?表示?不得不?、?必须?。We’ll have to leave now for it is very late at night.
have to的疑问形式是：助动词+…+have to,否定形式是：助动词+not+have to或者用needn’t.如：Do you have to stay until 8 o’clock?(你得呆到8点
钟吗？)/ You don’t have to do so.(=You needn’t do so.)(你不用这么做) ⒍ shall在问句中,可表示征求对方意见,与第一人称连用；在陈述句的第二、三人称的主语后或表示?命令?、?警告?、?允许?等。如：Shall we go to the zoo this weekend?(我们这个周末去动物园好吗？)/ He shall bring his own book next time.(他下次必须带自己的书来)
⒎ should可表示?劝告?、?建议?、?惊奇?等意思。We should speak to old people politely.(我们应该礼貌地对老人讲话)
⒏ will表示?意愿?、?决心?等意思,一般与第二人称连用。如：Will you please close the door for me?(请你替我把门关上好吗？)/ I will teach you a lesson.(我要教训你一顿)
⒐would表示过去的?意愿?、?决心?等。He would sit near the fire every time he returned home.(每次他回到家中总要坐在火炉边)
would也可以表示现在的情况,表达说话人向对方提出的要求,语气比?will?婉转、客气。在日常会话中,?我想要…?通常用?I would like to?或?I should(I’d) like to?来表示。如：Would you like to have a rest at the moment?(你现在想要休息一下吗？)
would还可以表示过去经常发生的事情。如：Every year parents would tell their children about the boy who would save his people.(每一年父母们总是向孩子们讲述这个将会拯救他的人民的男孩的事)
⒑ need表示?需要?,用于疑问句或否定句。?need?作实义动词时,在肯定、否定、疑问句中都可以用。如：He needn’t do it in such a hurry.(他不需要如此匆忙地做这件事)/ He needs some help.(他需要一些帮助)/ He doesn’t need to bring his football socks then.(那么他就无须带上足球袜了) ⑾ dare是?敢?的意思,用法几乎与?need?完全相同,即在疑问句和否定句中,可以作情态动词,后面用不带?to?的动词不定式。在肯定句中和实义动词一样,后面的动词不定式要带?to?。How dare you say I am a fool?(你竟敢说我是个傻瓜？)/ He didn’t dare to touch the red button.(他不敢触碰那个红色的按钮)
⑿ ‘d better (do)(?最好是?)一般也当作情态动词使用,否定式是：’d better not (do). 如：You’d better sit here and say nothing.(你最好坐在这儿不讲话)/ You’d better not speak because he is sleeping.(你最好不要讲话因为他正在睡觉)
2、动词词形变化一览表：
(1)规则动词变化表：
规 则变 化 原形动词结尾情况 现在时单三人称 现 在 分 词 过去式和过去分词
一般情况 +s +ing +ed
s,x,ch,sh,o结尾 +es +ing +ed
辅音字母+y结尾 y→i,+es +ing y→i,+ed
重读闭音节一元一辅结尾 +s 双写辅音字母,+ing 双写辅音字母,+ed 不发音的e结尾 +s 去掉e,+ing +d
ie结尾 +s ie→y,+ing +d
不规则变化 have→has；be→is (无) (见不规则动词变化表)
注意：⒈在加ing或ed时动词如果以?r?结尾,尾音节又重读的动词,?r?应双写。
⒉s/es的读音规则：在清辅音后读[s]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[z]；在[ s ]、
[ F]、[z]、[tF]、[dV]后读[iz].
⒊ed的读音规则：在清辅音后读[t]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[d]；在[t]、[d]后读[id].
(2)不规则动词变化表：( 原形 → 过去式 → 过去分词)
be(am,is) was been lose lost lost
be(are) were been make made made
beat beat beaten may might
become became become mean meant meant
begin began begun meet met met
blow blew blown mistake mistook mistaken
break broke broken must must
bring brought brought pay paid paid
build built built put put put
buy bought bought read read Read
can could ride rode ridden
catch caught caught ring rang rung
choose chose chosen rise rose risen
come came come run ran run
cost cost cost say said said
cut cut cut see saw seen
dig dug dug sell sold sold
do did done send sent sent
draw drew drawn set set set
drink drank drunk shall should
drive drove driven shine shone shone
eat ate eaten show showed shown
fall fell fallen shut shut shut
feel felt felt sing sang sung
find found found sink sank/sunk sunk/sunken
fly flew flown sit set set
forget forgot forgot/forgotten sleep slept slept
freeze froze frozen smell smelt smelt
get got got speak spoke spoken
give gave given spend spent spent
go went gone spill spilt spilt
grow grew grown spoil spoilt spoilt
hang hung/hanged hung/hanged stand stood stood
have(has) had had sweep swept swept
hear heard heard swim swam swum
hide hid hidden take took taken
hit hit hit teach taught taught
hold held held tell told told
hurt hurt hurt think thought thought
keep kept kept throw threw thrown
know knew known understand understood understood
lay laid laid wake woke/waked woken/waked
learn learnt/learned learnt/learned wear wore worn leave left left will would
lend lent lent win won won
let let let write wrote witten
lie lay lain
3、be(?是/存在?)动词的各种时态变化：
一 般 现 在 时 一 般 将 来 时 现 在 完 成 时
I am….
You are.…
He/She/It is….
We/You/They are…. (I等各人称) will be….
I am
He/She/It is going to be…
We/You/They are I have been….
You have been….
She/he/It has been….
We/You/They have been….
一 般 过 去 时 过 去 将 来 时 过 去 完 成 时
I was….
You were.…
He/She/It was….
We/You/They were…. (I等各人称) would be….
I was
He/She/It was going to be…
We/You/They were I had been….
You had been….
She/he/It had been….
We/You/They had been….
注意：句型变化时,
否定句在am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 后面加not,而且not都可以缩写为n’t (am后面not不可以缩写)；
疑问句将am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 提前到句首。
4、其它谓语动词(主动语态)的时态变化一览表：
现在 时态 一 般 现 在 时 现 在 进 行 时 一 般 将 来 时 现 在 完 成 时
谓语动词构成 动词用原形(单三加s / es)
(问句和否定句借用助词do / does) am
is +动词-ing
are will + 动词原形
am
is +going to+动词原形
are have +过去分词
has
过去 时态 一 般 过 去 时 过 去 进 行 时 过 去 将 来 时 过 去 完 成 时
谓语动词构成 动词用过去式
(问句和否定句借用助词did) was
+动词-ing
were would + 动词原形
was
+going to+动词原形
were had +过去分词
5、八种时态的具体用法：
(1) 一般现在时 表示现阶段经常或习惯发生的动作或存在的状态,或说明主语的特征。
⒈ 一般现在时句子中常有的时间状语：often,usually,sometimes,always,every (day等), once/twice,a (week等), on (Sunday等),never,in the (morning等)。如：They go to the Palace Museum once a year.(他们每年去一次故宫)/ They often discuss business in the evening.(他们经常在晚上商谈生意)
⒉ 表示客观真理、事实、人的技能或现在的状态时句子里一般不用时间状语。如：The earth turns round the sun.(地球绕着太阳转)/ Light travels faster than sound.(光传播比声音快)
⒊ 表示十分确定会发生(如安排好的事情)或按照时间表进行的事情,用一般现在可以表达将来,句子中可以有将来时间。如：The train for Haikou leaves at 8：00 in the morning.(开往汉口的列车上午8点开车)
⒋ 在时间状语从句中(以when, after, before, while, until, as soon as等引导)和条件状语从句中(以if,unless引导),用一般现在时代替一般将来时,句子可以有将来时间。如：Please ring me up as soon as you arrive in Germany.(你一到德国就给我打电话) / If it rains tomorrow,we will have to stay at home.(如果明天下雨我们就只好呆在家)
⒌ 一般现在时用于倒装句中可以表示正在发生的动作,动词以come, go为主。如：Here comes the bus. (车来了) / There goes the bell.(铃响了)。
⒍ 一般现在时常用于体育比赛的解说或寓言故事中。Now the midfield player catches the ball and he keeps it.
⒎ 人的心理活动和感官动作一般用一般现在时而不用现在进行时表达,常见动词有：like, love, hate, dislike, want, wish, hope, think(认为),understand, remember, forget, mean, need, hear, feel, see. 如：I think it is going to snow.(我想天要下雪了)/ I really hope you can enjoy your stay here.(我真的希望你愉快地呆在这儿)
(2) 一般过去时 表示过去某时发生的动作或状态,这种动作或状态可能是一次
性,也可能经常
发生。
⒈ 表示过去具体时刻发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：at (eight) (yesterday morning),(ten minutes) ago, when引导的时间状语从句。如：I got up at 6：00 this morning.(我是早上六点钟起床的)/ Little Tom broke the window at half past nine this morning.(小汤姆今天早上九点半把窗子打破了)/ When he went into the room,he saw a stranger talking with his father.(他走进房间时发现一个陌生人正和他父亲谈话)
⒉ 表示过去一段时间内不知何时发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：yesterday, last (year等), in (1998 等)。如：He came to our city in the year 2000.(他20xx年来到我们市)
⒊ 表示过去一个阶段中经常发生的事情时,时间状语有：last…, in…, from…to…, for(10 years),often,usually, sometimes, always, never等。如：Mr Jackson usually went to evening schools when he was young. / Every day he went to the rich man and borrowed books from him.
⒋ 讲故事、对过去经历的回忆、双方都明白的过去事件等一般用过去时,而且经常省略时间状语。如：I happened to meet Rose in the street.(我正好在街上遇到露西)
(3) 一般将来时 表示将来某一时刻或经常发生的动作或状态。
⒈一般将来时的时间状语有：tomorrow,this (afternoon),next (year),one day,now,soon,
someday,sometime, in the future, when引导的从句等。
⒉ 用will构成的将来时,表示动作与人的主观愿望无关。?shall?用于第一人称,?will?
用于所有人称。如：I will graduate from this school soon.(我很快就要从这所中学毕业了)/ You will stay alone after I leave.(我走了之后你就要一个人过了)
⒊ ?am/is/are going to+动词原形?表示打算或准备要做的事情,或者主观判断即将要发生的事情,而?am/is/are to +动词原形?表示安排或计划中的动作。如：A man told them that the woman was to give birth to the special baby.(有一个人告诉他们那个妇女就会生下那个特别的男孩)/ It’s going to rain soon.(天快要下雨了)
⒋ 表示一个人临时决定要做某事,可以用will表达。如：I will go to the lab to get some
chemicals(化学药剂). So please wait until I return.(我要到化学实验室去取些药品,请等我回头)
⒌ 现在进行时、一般现在时也可以表示将来。(见相应时态)
⒍ shall和will 在口语的一些疑问句中相当于情态动词。Shall一般与第一人称连用,will与第二人称连用。如：Shall we go to the zoo next Saturday?(我们下周六去动物园好吗？)/ Will you please open the door for me?(替我把门打开好吗？)
⒎ ?be to +动词原形?表示按照计划将要发生的事情。如：An angel came to tell her that she was to have this special boy.
(4)现在进行时 现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作或是现阶段正发生而此刻不一定在进行的动作。
⒈ 现在进行时由?助动词be (am is are ) +现在分词?构成。
⒉ 现在进行时的时间状语有： now, this …, these…等,但经常不用。如：What are you doing up in the tree?(你在树上干什么？)/ I am writing a long novel these days.(我最近在写一本长篇小说)
⒊ 表示即将发生的动作,一般指近期安排好的事情。常见的动词有：come, go, stay, leave, spend, do等。如：I’m coming now.(我就来)/ What are you doing tomorrow?(你明天干什么？)/ He is leaving soon.(他就要走了)
⒋ 表示频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。如：He is always borrowing money from me and forgetting all about it some time later.(他老是向我借钱,过一些时候就忘得一干二净)
(5)过去进行时 过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某阶段正在进行的动作。 ⒈ 过去进行时由?was(第一、三人称单数)或were(第二人称单数和各人称的复数)+现在分词?构成。
⒉ 过去进行时的时间状语有：then, at that time, this time yesterday, at (eight) yesterday (morning),(a year) ago, 以及由when引出的时间状语从句。如：He was cooking supper this time yesterday.(昨天这个时候他正在做晚饭)/ The little girl was playing with her toy when I saw her.(我看到小女孩的时候她正在玩玩具)
⒊ 用于宾语从句或时间状语从句中,表示与主句动作同时进行而且是延续时间较长。句子中通常不用时间状语。如：She was it happen when she was walking past.(她路过时看到事情的发生)/ They sang a lot of songs while they were walking in the dark forest.(他们在黑暗的森林里走时唱了很多歌)
⒋ 也可以表示过去一个阶段频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。如：He was always borrowing money from me when he lived here.(他住在这里时老向我借钱)
(6)现在完成时 现在完成时表示一个发生在过去的、对现在仍有影响的动作,或表示开始在过去,并且一直延续到现在,甚至还可能延续下去的动作。 ⒈在完成时由?助动词have (has)+动词的过去分词?构成。
⒉表示发生在过去的对现在仍有影响的动作时,时间状语有：already, yet, just, once, twice,ever, never,three times, before等。如：I have never seen such fine pictures before. (我以前从来没有看过这么好的画)/ He has just gone to England.(他刚去英国)
⒊表示在过去开始一直延续到现在(可能延续下去)的动作或状态时,时间状语有：for (two years),since 1990, since (two weeks ago)和since引导的状语从句。如：I have been away from my hometown for thirty years.(我离开家乡有30年了)/ Uncle Wang has worked in the factory since it opened.(自从这家工厂开张,王叔叔一直在那儿工作)
⒋口语中have got往往表示have(有)的意思。如：They have got thousands of books in their library.(他们图书馆有上万本书)
⒌have been to与have gone to的区别：have gone to(?已经去了?)表示人不在这里,have been to(?去过?)表示人在这里。如：--Where is Mr Li? –He has gone to the UK.(李先生在哪里？他去了英国。)/ --Do you know something about Beijing? –Yes,I have been to Beijing three times. (你知道北京的情况吗？是的,我去过那里三次。)
⒍在完成时中,一个瞬间性动词(一次性动作)不能与表示一段时间的状语连用,此时须将该瞬间动词改为延续性动词或状态动词。具体变化见下表：
瞬间性动词的完成时 → 延续性动词或状态动词的完成时
have (already) gone to… have been in / at … for (two years)
has come to… has been here since (1990)
(had) left… (had) been away from…
arrived… been in…
died been dead
begun been on
ended been over
bought... had…
borrowed… kept…
joined… been in …
或者使用下面这个句型：
It is / has been + (多久)+ since + 主语(人)+谓语(过去时)+……+过去时间状语
[注意] 在其它的时态中也存在类似问题,记住,关键是：瞬间动词不能和表达一段时间的状语连用。如：How long may I keep the book?(这本书我能借多久？)(句子中keep取代了borrow)
(7) 过去完成时 过去完成时表示过去某一时间或某一动作发生之前已经完成的动作。简言之, 过去完成时所表示的时间是?过去的过去?。
⒈过去完成时由?助动词had+动词的过去分词?构成。
⒉过去完成时时间状语有：by (yesterday), by then, by the end of (last…)或者由when,before等引出状语从句。有时句子中会有already, just, once, ever, never等词语,也会有for… 或since…构成的时间状语。如：They had already finished cleaning the classroom when their teacher came.(当老师来的时候他们已经打扫完了教室)/ The woman had left before he realized she was a cheat.(在他发觉那个妇女是个骗子时她已经走掉了)
⒊过去完成时常用于宾语从句中、after引导的从句中,或者从句是before引导的主句中。如：After I had put on my shoes and hat,I walked into the darkness.(我穿上鞋子戴上帽子走进了黑暗之中)/ He said that he had never seen a kangaroo before.(他说他以前从来没有见过袋鼠)
(8) 过去将来时 过去将来时表示在过去预计将要发生的动作或存在的状态。 ⒈过去将来时由?助动词should(第一人称)或would(第二、三人称)+动词原形?构成。在美国英语中,过去将来时的助动词一律用?would +动词原形?。
⒉过去将来时常由于宾语从句中,时间状语有：later, soon, the next (day).
⒊在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中不可以使用过去将来时,而应该使用一般过去时。如：He promised that he would pay me a lot if I helped him with the project.(他答应付给我许多钱如果我帮助他搞那个项目)/ Every time when he was free,he would sit down and read some books.(每次只要他有空他就会坐下来看看书)
⒋表示纯粹的将来时用would或should,表示打算或主观认为的事情用was/were going to (+动词原形)。如：She told me she would be 18 the next month.(她告诉我她下个月就18岁了)/ She told me that she was going to have a walk with her pet dog.(她告诉我她打算带她的宠物狗去散步)
⒌过去将来时还可以表示一个过去经常性的动作。如：When it rained in the day, he would bring an umbrella with him.(白天下雨时他会随身带一把雨伞)
(9)现在完成进行时：现在完成进行时指一个从过去就开始一直延续到现在并由可能继续下去的动作,它具有现在完成时和现在进行时双重特征,结构是：?have/has + been +动词的现在分词?。如：I have been swimming in the cold water for about two hours.(我已经在冰冷的水里游了将近两个小时)/ How long have you been waiting here?(你在这里一直等了多久？)
6、被动语态：
(1)被动语态定义：被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,用来说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。如果主语是 动作的执行者(即某人做某事),便叫主动语态；如果主语是动作的承受者(即某事被做),便叫被动语态。主动与被动的区别不是词序的区别,而是主语与谓语意义上的区别。在英语中只有及物动词和一些相当于及物动词的词组才有被动语态的形式。
(2)英语中被动语态由?助动词be +动词的过去分词?构成。助动词be有时态、人称和数的变化。被动语态后的by短语有时可省去。具体结构见下表： 现在时态 一般现在时 现在进行时 一 般 将 来 时 现在完成时
谓语动词构 成 am
is +p.p.
are am
is +being+p.p.
are will + be+p.p.
am
is +going to+ be + p.p.
are have(has) +been+p.p.
过去时态 一般过去时 过 去 进 行 时 过 去 将 来 时 过去完成时 谓语动词构 成 was +p.p.
were was
+being+p.p.
were would +be+p.p.
was +going to+be+p.p.
were had +been+p.p.
[注] p.p.表示过去分词。
(1) 被动语态的用法：
⒈ 不知道谁是动作的执行者(即不知道谁做)时用被动语态,省略by短语。如：A man was killed in the accident.(一个人死于事故)/ This window was broken
yesterday.(这扇窗子是昨天被打破的)
⒉不说或者众所周知是谁做时,用被动语态,省略by短语。如：Rice is also grown
in this place.(这个地方也种水稻)/ A railroad will be built here in three
years.(三年之后这里将要修建一条铁路)
⒊强调动作的承受者,句尾加by短语。如：It was written by Lu Xun.(它(书)
是鲁迅写的)/ A pet dog is never killed by its owner.(宠物狗是不会被主
人宰杀的)
(2) 主动语态如何改写为被动语态：
主动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + 宾语(人/物) + 其他 + 状语
(动作的执行者) (各种时态形式) (动作的承受者)
被动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + by +人 / 物 + 其他 + 状语
(动作的承受者) (be +过去分词) (动作的执行者)
(3) 注意点：
⒈?动词+间接宾语+直接宾语?改为被动时,可以用间接宾语做被动句的主语。
如：
His teacher gave him a dictionary.→He was given a dictionary by
his teacher.(老师给他一本字典→他得到老师一本字典)
也可以用直接宾语做被动句的主语,但是需用to或者for引出原句的间接宾语。
如：His teacher gave him a dictionary.→A dictionary was given to him by
his teacher.(老师给他一本字典→一本字典由老师送给了他)/His father made
him a kite.→A kite was made for him by his father.(他的父亲给他做了一
个风筝→一个风筝由他的父亲做给了他)
⒉?动词+宾语+动词原形?改为被动时,动词原形前要加to.如：The boss made
the poor man work 12 hours a day.→The poor man was made to work 12 hours
a day.(老板让这个可怜的人一天工作12小时→这个可怜人被迫一天工作12小
时)
⒊?动词+…+介词?改为被动时,介词一般在原位不动。如：The girl takes good
care of her little brother.→The girl’s little brother is taken good care
of by her.(女孩照顾小弟弟→女孩的小弟弟由她照顾着)
⒋?be+过去分词?未必表示被动语态,而可能是系表结构。如：
He is pleased / worried / tired /…….(系表)(他高兴/焦虑/疲劳……) He was hit / knocked down / told / shot / …….(被动)(他被击中/撞倒/关照/射中……)
7、动词的非谓语形式：动词不做谓语时的固定形式。
(1)动词的非谓语形式包括动词不定式、动名词和分词三种形式；其中分词又包含现在分词和过去分词两种形式。它们在句子中不能单独作谓语。
(2)动词不定式：
⒈ 形式：动词不定式基本形式由?不定式记号to+动词原形?构成。它的否定形式只要在?to? 前面加上?not?。它的疑问形式是：?wh-疑问词+to+动词原形?。*它的被动形式：?to be +过去分词?。*它的完成形式：?to have +过去分词?。
⒉ 动词不定式具有名词、形容词和副词的特征,即可以在句子中作主语、宾语、定语、状语、表语和宾语补足语。但不定式也保留动词的某些特征,即不定式后面可以跟宾语、表语和状语。动词不定式加上相关成分就构成不定式短语。 ⒊ 动词不定式可以放在谓语前句子作主语。但是通常将作主语的动词不定式或不定式短语放在谓语后面,而在主语位臵用?it?作形式主语(有时在不定式的前面还会用for sb.表示不定式的逻辑主语)。如：To help animals is helping people.(帮助动物就是帮助人)/ It is very difficult (for us) to learn Chinese well.((对于我们而言)学好汉语是非常的困难)/ It took me half an hour to work out this problem.(解出这道题花了我一个小时的时间) ⒋ 动词不定式可以作谓语动词(及物动词)的宾语。
[A] 及物动词+不定式一般形式：
谓语动词(vt.) +不定式
(作宾语) [说 明]
want(想) / try(试图) / decide(决定) / would like(想要) / hope(希望) / love(喜爱) / learn(学会) / afford(提供) / agree(同意) / fail(失败、未能) / mean(意味着) / prefer(宁愿) / wish(希望) + to (do) (无) help(帮助) to可以省略
begin(开始)/ start(开始)/hate(憎恨) 也可跟动名词,意义变化不大 forget(忘记) / remember(记得)/ like(总爱) 也可跟动名词,意义变化较大
如：I would like to have a rest at the moment.(我现在想休息一下)/ They began to search the room for the thief.(他们开始在屋子里搜寻小偷)/ He liked to have a swim in the pool near his house.(他喜爱在靠家的水塘里面游泳)/ When did you learn to speak English?(你什么时候开始学英语的？)/ Don’t forget to close the door when you leave.(你离开时别忘了关门
[比较] He forgot to turn off the light.(他忘了关灯.) (没关)/ He forgot turning off the light.(他忘记关过灯.)(关了) / Please remember to ring me up.(记得给我打电话.)(还没打电话) / I remember calling you yesterday but you forgot.(我记得昨天给你打电话了,但是你忘记了.)(打过电话)
[B] 及物动词+疑问词+不定式：
谓语动词(vt.) +wh-疑问词+不定式 (作宾语) [说明]
tell (告诉) / show (显示) / know (知道) / ask (问) / find out (发现) / understand (明白) / wonder(疑惑) / learn(学会) / forget(忘记) / remember(记得) / teach sb.(教某人) / discuss(商讨) what
where
+ how + to (do)
who
which
…… 不定式疑问形式还可以作句子的主语、表语等。
如：He does not know which one to take.(他不知道该选哪个)/ Tell me how to get to the station.(告诉我怎么样去火车站)/ She asked me what to do for today’s homework.(她问我今天家庭作业做什么)/ Can you teach me how to search the internet?(你能教我怎样上网吗？)
[C] 不定式作宾语而后面又有宾语补足语时,通常用it代替作形式宾语,而不定式则后臵。如： I found it not very easy to learn to ride a bike.(我发现学骑车不很容易)
⒌ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作定语,放在名词或代词后面。
[A] 记住下面的一些结构：
被修饰部分 + 不定式(作后臵定语) 汉 语 意 思
a key to lock the door 锁门的钥匙
a box to hold these things 装这些东西的箱子
give her a book to read 给她一本书读
Is there any (+名词/代词) to (do)? 有…要(做的)吗?
It’s time to go. 是走的时间了。/ 该走了。
Do you have any work to do? 你有工作要做吗?
I’d like something to eat. 我要点儿吃的。
I have nothing to say. 我没有话要说。
Would you like something to drink? 你要点儿喝的吗？
[B] 在这种情况下,如果不定式动词是不及物动词,则后面必须加介词。如： They could not find a place to live in.(他们找不到住的地方)/ Please give me a chair to sit on.(请给我一张椅子坐坐)/ He has got a writing brush to write with.((他找到了写字的毛笔)
⒍ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作状语,有下列几种情况：
[A] 放在不及物动词(come, go, stop, finish, wait等词)的后面。如：He came to see her yesterday.(他昨天来看望她)(表示来的目的)/ I stopped to have a rest.(我停下来休息一会儿)(表示停下来的目的)
[B] 放在完整的谓语之后(即?谓语+宾语?、?谓语+宾语+补语?、?动词+表语?之后)。如：We cleaned the room to let him play in it.(我们打扫了房间以便让他在里面玩)/ I opened the window to see more clearly.(我打开窗子以便看得更清楚点儿)
[C] 有时表示目的的不定式短语可以放在句首。如：To arrive there on time,I got up one hour earlier than usual.(为了按时到达,我们比平时早起了一个小时)(表示早起的目的)
[注意] stop to do 与stop doing的不同。如：They stopped to have a look.(他们停下来看看)(不定式作?停下来?的目的状语)/ They stopped looking out of
the window and began to listen to the teahcher.(他们停止向窗外望,开始听老师讲课)(动名词作宾语,表示?停止?的内容)
⒎ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作表语,限用于连系动词之后。如：My job is to keep the goal.(我的工作就是守住球门)
⒏ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作复合宾语中的宾语补足语。
谓 语 动 词(vt.) + 宾语 (人 / 物) +不定式 (作宾语补足语)
ask(请) / tell(关照) / teach(教) / want(想要) / would like(想要) / get(让) / help(帮) / invite(邀请) / like(喜欢) / warn(警告) / +sb. / sth. +to (do)
make(使得) / let(让) / hear(听) / see(看) / feel(感觉) / watch(观看)/ have(使得) / help(帮助) +sb. / sth. + (do)
如：Mum asked me to help her with the cooking.(妈妈叫我帮助她做饭)/ I would like you to see my parents.(我想要你见见我的父母)/ The boss often made the workers work 14 hours a day.(老板常让工人们一天工作14小时)/ Now let me hear you play the violin.(现在让我来听你拉小提琴)
[注意] help之后做宾补的不定式符号to可以省略；hear / see / feel / watch之后的宾补用不定式与现在分词时,含义不同,需特别注意,(参见现在分词部分)。试比较：
I heard her crying when I walked past.(我路过时听到她正在哭)(指当时瞬间的情况)
I sat near her and heard her sing the new song.(我坐在她附近听她唱新歌)(指整个过程)
(3)动名词
⒈ 动名词由动词原形加词尾?ing?构成。动名词有动词的特征,可以跟宾语,可以被状语修饰；它也有名词的特征,在句子中可以作主语、宾语(包括介词宾语)等。动名词加相关词语(宾语或状语等)构成动名词短语。
⒉ 动名词可以作主语。一般可用it作形式主语而将动名词短语后移。如：Learning English all by yourself is not so easy.(自学好英语不那么容易)(=It is not so easy learning English all by yourself.)
⒊ 动名词可以作宾语。
[A] want / need之后用动名词时,含有被动意思。如：Your car needs reparing badly.(你的车急需修理。)(被修)My hair needs cutting.(我要理发。)(头发被理)
[B] remember / forge / stop / finish之后用动名词时,与用不定式含义不同。如：I forgot to write a letter to him.(我忘了给他写封信)(根本没写) / I forgot writing a letter to him.(我忘了给他写过信)(写了却忘了) / They stopped to look back.(他们停下来向后看)(停下的目的是向后看) / They stopped looking back.(他们停止向后看)(不向后看了)
[C] enjoy / mind / keep / hate/ go等词一般用动名词作宾语。如：Do you mind my closing the door?(把门关上你介意吗？)/ She hates travelling by air.(她讨厌坐飞机旅行)/ They went swimming every afternoon.(他们每天下午去游泳)/ I enjoy walking around the town.(我喜欢在镇上转悠)
[D] like / love / start / begin / learn后面用动名词时,与用不定式意思
相近或相同。如：We began to study English when we were at primary school.(我们在小学时就开始学英语了) / We began studying English when we were at primary school. (我们在小学时就开始学英语了)
⒋ 动名词可以作表语,此时特别注意不要与现在进行时混淆。如：My job is putting these parts together.(我的事情是把这些部件拼起来) / I am putting these parts together.(我正在把这些部件拼起来)
⒌ 动名词与现在分词构成相同,但是含义不同,动名词主要表示事情,而现在分词则主要表示进行着的动作。如：Eating too much is not good for your health. (动名词短语,作主语) / Seeing is believing.(动名词短语,分别作主语和表语) / He ran after a moving bus and got onto it.(现在分词,作定语) / His father saw him sitting on some eggs.(现在分词,作宾补)
(4)分词： 包含现在分词和过去分词。(高中学习重点)
⒈ 主要区别：现在分词一般有主动的意思或表示动作正在进行的意思；过去分词有被动或动 作已经完成的意思。分词可以有自己的宾语或状语。
⒉ 分词或分词短语在句子中作定语、状语和复合宾语等。
[A] 作定语：分词作定语时,一般要放在修饰的名词之前,分词短语作定语时,则要放在所修饰的名词之后。 如：I have got a running nose.(我流鼻涕) / The woman running after the thief shouted very loudly,?Stop the thief!?(跟着小偷追的妇女大喊：捉小偷！) / Yesterday I met a man called Mr. Black.(昨天我遇见了一个名叫布莱克先生的人)/ He only gave me a broken glass,so I was very angry with him.(他只给了我一个坏玻璃杯,所以我很生他的气)
[B] 现在分词可以作下列动词的宾语补足语。(参考不定式作宾语补足语) 谓语动词(vt.) 宾语 宾语补足语
keep(保持) / see(看到) /
hear(听到) / watch(注意到) / feel(感觉到) sb./sth. (do)ing
如：Mum kept me working all the week.(妈妈让我一个星期都在工作)/ When I entered the room,I saw Jack eating a big pear.(我进入房间时看到杰克正在吃一只大梨子)/ In the dark I felt something very cold moving on my foot.(黑暗之中我感到有个冷的东西在我的脚上移动)
[C] 现在分词可以作状语,表示伴随情况。如：She came into the classroom,holding a pile of papers in her hand.(他走进教室,手上抓着一沓纸)/ I am very busy these days getting ready for the coming oral test.(这些日子我正忙着准备即将来到的口语考试)
[D] 过去分词可以作表语,放在连系动词后面,但要注意不要与被动语态混淆,?主系表?主要表示状态,而被动语态则表示动作。常用过去分词作表语的结构有：be worried (焦虑) / be pleased (高兴) / be tired (疲劳) / get dressed (打扮好) / get lost (迷路) / get caught (遭遇) / beome frustrated (沮丧) / become intereted in (对…感兴趣)等等。例略。
[E] 过去分词可以作宾语补足语。如：I had my hair cut this morning.(今天早上我让人给我理了发)(注意：have sth. done表示动作由别人来做,而have done sth.则为现在完成时的结构,两个结构不可以混淆)
8、动词用法辨析：
(1)?Why not+动词原形+…??(干嘛不……?)是简略句,完全形式是：Why don’t you +动词原形+…?如：Why not go and have a look?(干嘛不去看看？)/ Why
not try it once again?(为什么不再试试？)
(2) seem(好象)的用法：记住几个结构：⒈sb./sth. + seem + (to be+)形容词+…；⒉sb./sth. + seem + like +…；⒊sb/sth + seem + to (do)；⒋It seems that + 从句。如：He seemed (to be) very happy when he was called by the headmaster. (被校长叫到名字时他好象很开心) / It seems that nobody else could do such a foolish thing except Jim. (除了吉姆好象没有什么人会做出如此愚蠢的事情来)
(3) be afraid(害怕)的用法：记住几个结构：⒈be afraid of sth; be afraid of (doing); ⒉be afraid to (do); ⒊be afraid that+从句。如：She is a little afraid of snakes.(她有点怕蛇)/ Don’t be so afraid to stay at home alone at night.(别害怕晚上一个人在家)/ I’m afraid that somebody will take his place because of his serious mistakes.(恐怕有人要取代他了,因为他犯了那么大的错误)
(4) be sorry(抱歉)的用法：记住几个结构：⒈be sorry for (sth); ⒉be sorry for (doing sth); ⒊be sorry to (do); ⒋be sorry that+从句。如：I am very sorry for keeping you waiting so long.(不好意思让你久等了)I am sorry to trouble you.(对不起,麻烦你了)/ I am sorry (that) he isn’t here at the moment.(恐怕他现在不在)
(5) be sure (确信)的用法：记住几个结构： ⒈be sure of (sth); ⒉be sure to(do); ⒊be sure that+从句。如：She told me many times that she was sure to come.(她给我讲过多次她一定会来的) / Are you sure of your answer?Maybe it’s wrong.(你对你的答案有把握吗？也许是错的。)/ I am sure that Dad will help me with the job.(我确信爸爸会帮着我做这件事情的)
(6) make 与do的用法：一般情况下表示进行活动或者做工作用do,表示创造建构某事物用make. 如：I don’t know what to do.(我不知道该干什么)/ I’m not going to do any work.(我不准备做什么)/ My father and I once made a boat.(我和我爸曾经做过一只船)
此外还要记住一些固定说法：do good / harm / business / one’s best / a favour……
make a decision / an effort / a mistake / a noise / a phone call / money / war / the bed / sure,...
(7)put on、wear、have…on、be in、try on、dress的用法：put on强调?穿、戴?这个动作过程,wear则表示?穿着、戴着?这一状态,have+衣物+on主要表示状态,be in(+颜色/衣物)也是表示一个状况,dress(+人)表示?给…人穿衣?。如：Please put on your new shoes.(请穿上你的新鞋)/ The twins are wearing the same clothes.(双胞胎穿着相同的衣服)/ Today she has an overcoat on.(今天她穿着一件大衣) / Do you know the woman who is in black?(你认识那个身穿黑衣的女人吗？)/ Dad is dressing Tom now.(爹正在给汤姆穿衣)
[注意]dress与wear或put on的区别：wear或put on常用衣物作宾语,而dress常用人作宾语。表示给自己穿衣时常用?get dressed?或?dress oneself?表达。be dressed in与wear基本同义。dress up意为?穿上盛装、乔装打扮?。如：Could you dress the baby for me?(你能替我给宝宝穿衣吗？)/ He is eight but can’t dress himself.(他八岁了,还不会穿衣服)/ She was dressed in a red coat.(她穿着一件红上衣)/ Do I have to dress up to go to Jim’s party?(我
得穿上好衣服去参加吉姆的聚会吗？)
(8)like、love与enjoy的用法：三个词都含有?喜欢?的意思,但是,like和enjoy后面跟动名词,love 后面一般跟动词不定式。like后面有时跟动词不定式,表示一种习惯或嗜好(往往与具体的时间或地点有关)。enjoy后面还可以加名词、反身代词,表示?享受…乐趣；玩得开心?。如：Do you like shopping?(你喜欢购物吗？)/ He likes to have a swim when he gets home every afternoon.(每天下午放学后他总爱游个泳)/ They love to sing foreign songs.(他们喜爱唱外国歌曲)/ Did you enjoy yourself at the party?(在聚会上你玩得开心吗？)/ He enjoys living in China.(他喜欢在中国生活)
(9)study、learn的用法： study主要表示?学习、研究?,指过程；而learn主要表示?学会?,指结果。表示?学?时可以互换。如：How many subjects do you study?(你学多少门课程？) / Have you learned it yet?(这个你学过了吗？)/ How long have you studied/learned English?(你学英语多久了？) learn还可以表示?听说?,如：He learned the musician himself was in town.(他听说音乐家本人就在城里)
(10)think、want、would like的用法：三个词都含有?想?的意思,但think指?思考、考虑?,want指?想要、愿望、企图?,would like指?想要?,think后面一般跟介词短语或从句,want和would like后面跟名词或动词不定式。如：Do you think that China will become a developed country in 40 years? (你认为中国会在40年后成为发达国家吗？)/ I am thinking of the money I once lent to Li Min.((我正在想着以前借给黎敏的钱)/ What do you really want to say?(你到底想干什么？)/ Which of these cakes would you like (to have)?(这些饼子中你想吃哪些？)
(11)look for、search…for、find、find out的用法：前面两个词语表示动作过程,后面两个表示结果,look for指?寻找?不见的或丢失的东西,但还没有找到；search…for…指?为找…而搜寻…?；find指?找到?了东西；find out主要指?查明一个事实真相?。如：Hey, Monkey, what are you looking for in the cupboard?(嘿,猴儿！你在厨子里面找什么呢？)/ Have you found the lost key to your car?(你找着丢失的车钥匙了吗？)/ The soldiers were searching the room for the spy when they heard a loud noise.(士兵们正在房间里面搜寻间谍突然间他们听到了衣声巨响)/ Let’s try to find out who broke the window.(让我们查查谁把窗子打破了)
[注解] find的几个结构：find sb. sth?为某人找到…?,find sth./sb. + adj./n.?发觉某人是…?,find it +adj. + to do…(或+宾语从句)?发现(做……)如何?。如： His mother found her daughter a very clever girl.(他的母亲发现她的女儿是个聪明的女孩)(名词作补语补足语) / You can easily find it not good for your health to eat cold food.(你很容易就会发现吃冷食对你的身体是不利的)
(12)listen to、hear的用法：两个词与听觉有关,listen to指?听?这一过程,hear指?听到?这一结果。如：Are you listening to me,Jim? Yes,I have heard your words.(吉姆,你在听我说吗？是的,你的话我全听见了)
(13)look、see、watch、read的用法：四个词均与眼睛有关,look指放眼去?看?(不管是否看得到),指?看?的过程；see指?看见?这一结果,有时see还引申为?明白?,表示?看?时后面加?电影?等词；watch指专注的看,含有?注视、
监视?之义,后面常跟?电视、比赛?等词；read限制为看书面材料,译为?看、阅读?,后面跟?书、报纸、杂志?等词。如：What are you looking at?(你在看什么？)/ Please look at the blackboard. (请看黑板)/ Let me go to see the film, mum, will you? (妈妈,让我去看电影吧,好吗？)/ He won’t feel well until he finishes watching the football match. (要看完了足球赛他才会感觉好些)/ Reading gives us knowledge.(阅读给我们知识)
(14)hear、hear of、hear from、learn的用法： hear?听说?,后面可以跟名词、代词、从句表示听见的内容,hear of?听说?,后面跟人,指对某人有耳闻但没有见过面；hear from?收到……的来信?,后面加人；learn?听说、得知?,后面跟从句,含义与hear相似。如：I hear Mr Green is coming to see us tonight. (我听说格林先生今晚要来看望我们)/ Have you ever heard of the man who once went to the Himalaya Mountains? (你是否听说过那个去过喜马拉雅山的人？)/ How often do you hear from your father? (隔多久你收到你父亲的信？)/ He learned the musician himself was in town.(他听说音乐家本人就在城里)
(15)speak、talk、say、tell的用法：四个词与?说?有关。speak?讲话、发言、演说?,是不及物动词,涉及人时要加介词to,speak作及物动词时后面跟语言名称；talk?谈话、闲谈?,是不及物动词,涉及人时用介词with、to等,涉及事情时后面跟介词about等；say 是及物动词,后面跟名词、代词、从句等,表示说的内容；tell是及物动词,后面首先要跟人,然后再跟从句或者介词短语等。如：Do you speak English? (你讲英语吗？)/ Who spoke at the meeting? (谁在会上发了言？)/ Our teacher is talking to Lin Tao’s parent. (我们的老师正在跟林涛的家长讲话)/ Can you say it in English? (你能用英语说出它吗？)/ Please tell me something about the strange flying object. (请跟我讲讲那个奇怪的飞行物的事情吧)
(16)be able to(do)、can的用法：can是情态动词,有许多含义,表示?可能、可以、会?等意思,只有现在式can和过去式could两种形式；be able to表示能力上?会?,有多种时态形式,to后面跟动词原形,有时可以与can/could互换。如：Can you speak English? (你会说英语吗？)/ He couldn’t(wasn’t able to) swim when he was 12. (他十二岁时不会游泳)
(17)there be、have的用法：两个词都可以译为?有?,但是,have表示的是?拥有?,主语必须是人或者物；there be表示?存在?的概念,主语在there be之后。如：How many brothers and sisters do you have? I have only one brother. (你有多少兄弟？我只有一个兄弟。)/ How many chairs and desks are there in their classroom? There is none. (他们教室里有多少张桌椅？一张也没有。)
[注解]there be sb./sth doing与there be sb./sth to do 有所不同：用doing表示一个正在发生的事情,而用to do 则表示一个滞后或迟于there be的动作。如： Look! There is a dog lying on the stairway. / Take your time. There is nothing for you to do tonight.
(18)borrow、lend、keep的用法：表示?借?的三个词,borrow?借进?、lend?出借?都是一次性动作,不可以和表示一段的时间状语连用；keep?保存?用来表示借一段时间。如： I have lost the book I borrowed from my teacher. What can I do? (我丢掉了从老师那里借来的书)/ How long have you kept my dictionary,eh?For more than two months! (呃,我的字典你借了多久了？两个多月了！)
(19)bring、take、carry、send、lift的用法：bring指从远处?拿来?；take指从面前?拿走?；carry指一般的搬运,不涉及方向；send主要指?送、派遣、寄?；lift指把东西由低向高?提起、拎起?。例略。
(20)hope、wish的用法：两个词都表示?希望?,但是,hope表达有把握或信心实现的事情,后面直接跟动词不定式或者宾语从句,不可以跟动名词或作宾语补足语的不定式；wish表达实现的可能性不大的事情,后面跟名词、宾语从句(用过去时)或者作宾语补足语的不定式。如：We all hope to see him very soon. (我们全都希望尽快见到他)/ I hope it will be fine tomorrow so that we can go out. (我希望明天天好,这样我们就能出去了。)/ How I wish it was not raining at the moment!(我多么希望此刻不在下雨！)(事实上天正在下雨)
(21)take、spend、pay、cost的用法：
spend的宾语通常是金钱或时间,句型：sb.+(spend)+时间/金钱+on sth / (in) doing sth. ；
take的主语通常是事情,句型：sth./It + (take)+sb.+时间+to do… 。(如果是动作则常用it作形式主语将动词不定式后移)；
cost的宾语通常是时间、金钱、力气,句型：sth. +(cost)+sb.+时间/金钱/力气. ；
pay的宾语通常是金钱,句型：sb.+(pay)+金钱+for+事物.
如：She spent the whole night reading the novel. (她花了一个晚上看那本小说)/ This job will take me two days.=It will take me two days to do the job. (做这件事情要花我两天的时间)/ How much does a house like this cost? (像这样的房子要花多少钱？)/ I paid him twenty dollars for the book.. (我花了20元从他那儿买了书)
(22)begin、start的用法：begin在大多数情况下可以替代start,(反义词是end),后面接不定式或动名词时区别不大,但是start还可以表示?开始、出发、启动?,反义词是stop；某事停止后再重新开始一般用start.如：When did you begin/start to learn English? (你什么时候开始学英语的？)/ They started getting in the crops after the rain stopped. (雨停后他们开始收割庄稼) / This time he could not start his car. (这次他没法启动他的汽车)
(23)arrive in/at、reach、get to的用法：arrive是不及物动词,到达具体地点时后面加介词at,到达一个大的地方(国家、城市)时后面加介词in,arrive后面可以直接跟地点副词here/there/home等；get表示?到达?时是不及物动词,涉及地点(无论大小)时后面加to,get后面可以直接跟地点副词here等；reach是及物动词,后面直接跟地点名词。如：He arrived in San Francisco last Sunday. (上个星期天他抵达旧金山)/ How did you get there in the night? (你是怎样在夜间到达那里的？)/ We hurried all the way and reached the station just five minutes before the train left. (我们一路狂奔在火车启动前5分钟到达车站)
(24)be made of、be made from、be made into、be made in、be made by、be made for的区别：be made of指从制成品中可以看得出原材料,而be made from则指从制成品中看不出原材料,口语中都可以换成be made out of。 be made into表示?被制成……?,be made in表达被制造的地点,be made by表达制造的人,be made for表达被制造的目的。如：This kind of paper is made from bamboo. (这种纸是由竹子生产的)/ The desk is made of wood and metal. (桌子是铁
和木头打的)/ A lot of paper has been made into paper birds. (许多纸被折叠成了小鸟)/ Computers are made in these cities. (计算机是在这几个城市制造的)/ This kite was made by Uncle Wang. (这个风筝是王叔叔做的)/ A big bag was made for me to hold my waste things.(一只大包做好了让我装废物)
(25)be used for、be used to、used to、get used to的区别：be used for + 名词/代词或动名词, be used to + 动词原形,表示两个短语意思相近,表示?用于…?。 used to + 动词原形,表示?过去常常?,否定式可以是?didn’t use to?也可以是?usedn’t to?；get/be used to + 动名词,表示?习惯于….?。如：A knife can be used for cutting things.(刀可以用来割东西)/ A knife can be used to cut things.(刀可以用来割东西)/ He used to borrow novels from the library when he was at school. (他上学时常常在图书馆借书)/ He is used to getting up early in the morning. (他习惯早起)
(26)beat,win与lose： beat (打败),后面跟?人?,而win(赢得),后面跟?比赛、竞赛?等。如：Who won at last? (最后谁赢了？)/ Class Three beat us 5-0. (三班以5∶0打败了我们)/ I am sure to win the match. (我一定能赢得比赛)
而lose则表示?输了?,常用句型：lose sth. to sb. 如：Unluckily we lost the match to Class Three. (不幸的是我们比赛输给了三班)
(27)grow、plant、keep的区别：plant着重讲?栽、种植?这个动作,grow则指种植以后的?栽培?、?管理?,而keep则主要指?喂养?、?赡养?一个人或者动物。如 ：He grew vegetables in his garden. (他在园子里种菜)/ I planted ten trees last year,but four of them died. (去年我栽了10棵树,但是死了4棵)/ Old women enjoy keeping cats or dogs to kill the time. (老年的妇女喜欢养猫养狗打发时间)
(28)fall 、drop的区别：fall指东西由高处向下坠落,不及物动词；也可以作连系动词,意思是?变得,进入某种状态?。drop表示物体由高处往低处落下,不及物动词；或让物体落向低处,及物动词。如：The man fell off the tractor and hurt himself. (那个人从拖拉机上摔下来跌伤了)/ Soon after they touched the pillows they fell (系动词) fast asleep. (他们头挨枕头不久就睡着了)/ He felt as if he had to drop maths.(他觉得似乎要放弃数学)/ He dropped a letter into the mail-box.(他向邮箱里丢了一封信)
(29)join、join in、take part in的区别：join多指参加组织、团体、党派等,后面跟人时表示和某人一起参加某项活动；join in指参加某项游戏或活动；take part in多指参加群众性的活动、运动、会议等。如：He joined the army in 2001.(他20xx年参军)/ They joined me in congratulating you.(他们和我一起向你祝贺)/ Do join us in the game.(千万参加我们的比赛) / He took an active part in the students’ movement in the 1940s.(在二十世纪40年代他积极参加学生运动)
(30)beat、hit、strike的用法区别：beat指?连续不断地打击；(心脏的)跳动?；hit指?一次性地撞击、命中?；strike与hit基本同义,还可以理解为?划(火柴)、给……深刻的印象?。如：The man looks dead,but his heart is still beating weakly. (那个人看上去死了可心脏还在微弱地跳动) / He hit the ball so hard that it flew over their heads and fell into the lake. (他踢球
的劲太大球飞过他们的头顶落入水中) / He went into the room and struck a match(火柴). (他走进房间划着了一根火柴)
(31)carry on、carry out的区别：carry on表示?进行、继续?；carry out表示?进行、贯彻、实现?。如：I will carry on the work. (我会继续工作)/ I have some difficulties in carrying out his orders. (对于执行他的命令我有问题)
(32)be amazed与be surprised的区别：be amazed?感到惊讶?,指人对某个不可能发生却实际发生了的事情感到极其的讶异；be surprised?感到吃惊?指人对突发的事件感到惊讶。如：When he dived deep into the sea, he was amazed at the colours of all the beautiful coral reefs. (他深潜到海中时被所有美丽的珊瑚礁惊呆了) / He was very surprised when he heard a loud noise from inside the room. (听到房间里传出一个很大的声音他非常地吃惊)
(33)warn的用法：?warn sb. of/about sth?意思是?针对…而警告某人?；?warn sb (not) to do sth?意思是?告戒某人(不)要做某事?；?warn sb. + that从句?意思是?警告某人说……?。如：They warned the passengers of thieves. (他警告路人小心窃贼) / I warn you that you will fail in the coming exams if you are still so lazy. (我警告你：如果你还这么懒在即将来到的考试中你会不及格的。) / He was warned not to go out in the late night. (他受到警告不要在深夜出去)
(34)think of与think about等短语的区别：think of表示?考虑、思念、认为、想起、建议?等；?think about?表示?看待、认为?；?think much /highly /a lot of?表示?高度评价…?；?think over?表示?仔细考虑?；?think out?表示?想出?。如：The headmaster thought highly of this boy. (校长高度地评价了这个男孩) / We’re thinking of going to France for our holiday. (我们在考虑去法国度假的事情) / Think it over and you will have a way. (仔细考虑就有办法) / I cannot think of his name. I forgot it. (我想不起他的名字我忘了) / －What do you think about his composition? －Very good! (他的作文你觉得怎么样？ 很好。)
(35)agree with/ agree to / agree on等词语用法：?agree to+动词?表示?同意做某事?,?agree with + sb./观点?表示?赞同…的观点?/ agree about表示?对…话题有相同看法?/?agree to +建议?表示?同意?某人的建议,?agree on + 决定?表示?赞成某人的决定?。例略。
(36)deserve(应该,应得)的用法：deserve后面可以加不定式,也可以加名词。如：They had tried their best and they deserved to win. (他们尽力了该赢。) / The little boy always made troubles around and deserved beating. (小男孩总是处处惹麻烦活该被打) / The girl did a good deed and deserved praise. (女孩做了好事应该受到表扬)
九、连接词
1、连词的含义：连接词与词、短语与短语、或引导从句的词叫连接词。
2、连词的分类：连词分为并列连接词和从属连接词两种。
1、并列连接词连接并列的词、短语、从句或句子。常见的并列连接词有：and(和),but(但是),or(或者,否则),nor(也不), so(所以), however(然而,无论如何),for(因为),still(可是),as well as(也),both..and...(...和...), not
only ...but also...(不但…而且…), either… or…(或…或…),neither… nor…(既不…也不…)等。
2、从属连接词用于引导从句,常见的从属连接词有：
when(当…时候), while(正当…时候), after(在…之后), before(在…之前), since(自从), until(直到), although/though(虽然), if(假如), as(如…一样；由于), as …as…(和…一样), as far as(就…而言), as long as(只要), as soon as(一…就…), even if(即使), because(因为), unless (除非), than(比…), whether (是否…), in order that…(为了), so…that…(如此…以致), so that…(以便), now that…(现在既然), by the time…(到…时候), every time…(每当), as if…(仿佛),no matter when(或whenever)(无论何时),no matter where(或wherever)(无论在哪里)等。
［辨析］
(1) because、as、since、for的用法：because(因为)表示原因的语气最强,常表示必然的因果关系,从句一般放在主句后面；另外,回答why的问句只能用because. as(因为)表示一般的因果关系,语气比because弱,说明比较明显的原因,它引导的从句可以放在句首也可以放在句尾。since(既然)表示对方已经知道、无需加以说明的原因或事实。for(因为)是并列连词,语气较弱,用来补充说明理由或提供一种解释。如：He is not at school today because he is seriously ill.（他今天没有上学因为他病得厉害）/ As all of you have got here, now, let’s go to the zoo.（既然大伙儿都到了我们就去动物园吧）/ I will ask Lin Tao to go with me since you are very busy.（既然你很忙我就叫林涛和我一起去吧）/ We must be off now for the match starts at 7：00.（我们得走了因为比赛在七点开始）
(2)if、whether的区别：表示?是否?时,if和whether同义,引导宾语从句,另外,whether还可以引导主语从句、表语从句(以及同位语从句)等名词性从句或者让步状语从句；而if还可以表示?如果?,引导条件状语从句,(主句与从句遵循主将从现的原则)。如：I don’t know if/whether he will arrive on time.（我不知道他是不是会按时到达）/ I will ring you up if he arrives on time.（如果他按时到达我会给你打电话的）
[注意]下列情况只能用whether不能用if：⒈引导主语从句,⒉引导表语从句,⒊引导从句作介词宾语,⒋引导不定式短语,⒌引导让步状语从句,⒍在动词discuss之后,⒎在wonder / not sure之后,⒏在if与whether含义易混时。如：Whether it is a fine day next Sunday is still a question.（下个星期天是不是个好天还是个问题）(引导主语从句) / Please ask him whether to go there with a raincoat or not.（请问一下带不带雨衣去那儿）(作动词的宾语) / Hainan is the place to be, whether it’s summer or winter.（海南是个该去的地方无论冬夏）(引导让步状语从句)/ Please let me know whether you need my help.（请告诉我你是否需要我的帮助）(引导宾语从句)(如果换成if则还可能表示?如果你需要我的帮助请告知?)
(3)while、when、as的用法区别：while常表示一个较长的动作,它引导的从句动作与主句的动作是同时发生的、是平行的；when可以表示较短的动作也可以表示较长的动作,主句和从句的动作可以同时发生也可以先后发生；as与上两词同义,可替换while和when, 表示主句和从句的动作同时发生,常译为?一边……一边……?。如：Please do not trouble me while I am writing my homework.
（我写作业时请不要打扰我）/ I’ll go home when I have finished my job.（我干完了活儿就回去）/ They were running quickly across the road when they heard the sound of a truck coming.（他们正快速地穿过马路忽然听到了卡车开来的声音）/ As we walked in the dark street, we sang songs and talked loudly.（当我们在黑洞洞的街上走路时我们高声地唱歌说话）
(4)till/until与not…till/until的区别：前者表示一个延续性的动作,后者表示一个才开始的动作。如：I will stay here and watch the baby until you return.（我会呆在这里看着娃娃直到你回来）(stay这个动作一直进行到你return) / They won’t go on working until they get what they think is reasonable.（他们要到获得了他们认为合理的东西时才会继续干下去的）
另外till与until基本可以互换,但是在句首时只能用until,不能用till. 如：Until the last minute of the match we kept playing.（我们坚持到比赛的最后一分钟）/ Not until he had finished his work did he go home.（直到做完工作他才回家）（倒装句）
(5)though与although的区别：两个词都表示?虽然?,均不可以与but同时使用,但在句中可加still或yet连用。although?尽管、虽然?仅作连词,比较正式,一般可以换为though； though?虽然、尽管、即使?,还可以与even连用(=even if),表示?即使、纵然?,作副词时意思是?然而、不过?,不能放在句首。如：He passed the exams although illness prevented him from going to classes.（尽管疾病使他无法上课但是他还是通过了考试）/ she won’t leave the TV set,even though her husband is waiting for her for the supper.（她不愿离开电视机虽然丈夫在等她吃饭）/ It was a quiet party. I had a good time, though.（这是个不热闹的聚会尽管如此我还是玩得很开心）
(6)prefer to…rather than…与prefer…to…的区别：prefer to…rather than…后面都是用动词原形,prefer…to…都是用动名词或名词。如：I prefer English to Japanese.（与日语相比我更喜欢英语）/ I prefer to learn English rather than learn Japanese. （与日语相比我更喜欢学英语）
十、简单句
1、简单句的特点：简单句通常只由一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语(或并列谓语)构成。
2、简单句的种类：简单句一般分为陈述句、疑问句、感叹句和祈使句四种。
3、陈述句：
用来说明一个事实的句子叫陈述句。它有肯定式和否定式两种形式。
▲陈述句的肯定式： He is a middle school student.（他是个中学生）/ I have a hammer in my hand.（我手上有把锤子）/ She teaches us geography.（她教我们地理）/ The new play was good enough and everybody enjoyed it.（新的话剧非常好大家都喜欢）
▲陈述句的否定式：
1)谓语动词如果是to be 、助动词、情态动词时,在它们的后面加?not?。如：My brother is not a teacher.（我的弟弟不是教师）/ He does not have a cousin.（他没有堂兄弟）/ I will not go there tomorrow.（明天我不去那儿）/ My mother is not cooking a meal in the kitchen.（我母亲现在不在厨房里做饭）/ You must not make such mistakes again.（你不该再犯类似错误了） / We haven’
t discussed the question yet（我们还没有讨论那个问题呢）.
2)谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时,须在它的前面加do not(don’t).如： I don’t know anything about it.(此事我一无所知) / Li Ming does not feed pigs in the countryside.（李明不在农村养猪）/ We didn’t expect to meet her right here.（我们没指望着在这里见到她）/ We didn’t have a meeting yesterday afternoon.(昨天下午我们没有开会)
3)如果?have?作?有?讲,也可以在它后面加not构成否定式,其形式与have got的否定式相同。 如：I haven’t (got) any brothers or sisters.（我没有兄弟姐妹）
[注意]
⒈句子中如果有all、both、very much/well等词时,用not一般构成部分否定,如果要完全否定,则通常使用none、neither、not…at all等；All of them went there.→None of them went there.（他们全都去了那里→他们全都没去那里） ⒉句子中含有little、few、too(太)、hardly、never、neither、nor、seldom等词时, 则视为否定句。如：Few people live there because life there is very hard.（几乎没有人生活在那里因为那里的生活太艰难了）
⒊陈述句(主语+谓语+其他)在口语中可以直接表示疑问,表示惊讶或明知故问。如：That’s your boss?（那就是你的老板？！）
⒋陈述句一般情况下应使用正常的语序,即：主语+谓语+其他。但是有时会倒装,详见?倒装句?。
⒌所有的从句一律使用陈述句语序,即在连接词后采用?主语+谓语+其他?的顺序。如：The old man told me that he would live here for ten more years before he returns home. （老人告诉我说他还要在这儿住几年然后回家）/ Could you tell me who you saw at the party last night?（能告诉我在聚会上你都看见了谁吗？）
4、疑问句：
▲一般疑问句： 用?yes?或?no?来回答的疑问句叫做一般疑问句。
1)一般疑问句构成：句中谓语动词是to be、助动词、情态动词时,则将它们(提前)放到主语前面。如：Is he an engineer?（他是工程师吗？）/ Have you got today’s newspaper? （你有今天的报纸吗？）/ Shall we go to see a film this evening? （我们今晚去看电影好吗？）/ Can you explain it ?（你能解释它吗？）/ Is there any fish for supper?（晚饭有鱼吗？）/ Would you like to go out for a walk?（你想出去散步吗？）
谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时,则在主语前面加助动词do / does / did, 原来的谓语动词改为原形。如：Do you get up at six every morning?（你天天早晨六点起身吗？）/ Does she study hard?（她学习努力吗？）/ Did you go there yesterday?（昨天你去那儿了吗？）
2)一般疑问句的回答：
一般疑问句通常用简略形式来回答。如：
Will you join us in playing basketball?（你加入我们打篮球好吗？）—Yes, we will.（是的我们会。）/ —No, we won’t.（不我们不会。）
Have you got today’s newspaper?（你有今天的报纸吗？）—Yes, I have .（是的有。）/ —No, I haven’t.（不没有。）
回答时所用的时态应和问句里的时态一致。
[注意] 回答must或者may开头的疑问句要小心,参见情态动词有关内容。
3)一般疑问句的否定结构(即否定形式的一般疑问句)表示惊奇、责怪、建议、看法等,只要将?not?臵于主语之后或者将?not?放到主语之前与be, have等助动词或情态动词合并在一起就可以了。如：
Will he not come?（他难道不来吗？）/ Isn’t your sister a Party member?（你的姐姐不是党员吗？）/ Haven’t you any brothers?（你没有哥哥吗？）/ Don’t you like the play?（你难道不喜欢这个话剧吗？）/ Can’t we walk a little farther?（我们不能走远些吗？）/ Won’t you sit down?（你不想坐下吗？）/ Hasn’t she heard of the matter?（她没听说过这事儿？） 这种否定结构的疑问句的回答与汉语的习惯不同。如果回答是肯定的,就用?yes+肯定结构?；如果回答是否定的,就用?no+否定结构?。(情况与反意问句类似。)如：
Can’t he answer the question? (他不能回答这个问题吗？)
—Yes,he can.(不,他能回答这个问题。) —No,he can’t. (是的,他不能回答这个问题。)
▲特殊疑问句：要求具体回答的问句。
1)特殊疑问句结构是：
疑问代词 +一般疑问句+？
除who以外的疑问代词短语
疑问副词
如：What do you want?（你要什么？）/ Who(m) are you looking for ?（你在找谁？）/ Whose magazine is this?（这是谁的杂志？）/Which class are you in?（你在哪班？）/ When did you get up this morning?（你今早什么时候起身的？）/ Where have you been?（你到哪儿去了？）/ Why did he go to bed so early?（他为什么这么早睡觉？）/ How did you go there?（你是怎么去的那儿？）
但是,?who?引出的询问主语或主语部分相关词的特殊疑问句的结构与陈述句词序相同：如：Who is dancing over there?（谁在那边跳舞？）
有时?what?,?which?,?whose?也可以引出与陈述句词序相同的特殊疑问句。如：What is on the wall?（什么东西在墙上？/墙上有什么？）/ Which is yours?（哪个是你的？）/ Whose book is in your bag?（谁的书在你的书包里？）
[注意]从陈述句改为特殊问句时,先将句子改为一般问句,再将(划线)提问部分更改为疑问词臵于句首,特别要注意助动词的使用！如果只对主语或主语的修饰词提问,那么只需要将疑问部分改为疑问词即可。
2)常用疑问代词和疑问副词：
疑问代词： who, whom, whose, which, what,
疑问副词： when, where, why, how,
how构成的短语：how many (多少个) (独立用；或跟可数名词), how much (多少) (独立用；或跟不可数名词), how old (多大年纪), how far (多远), how often (多常),how long (多久,多长), how soon (多久以后),how many times (多少次),等等。
3)特殊疑问句有时也用否定式。如：Why don’t you ask Jim instead?(常缩略为Why not…?) (你为什么不转请Jim呢？)
4) 特殊疑问句疑问部分有时可以有两个以上的疑问词。如：When and where were
you born? (你是何时何地出生的？)
5) 疑问词如果是介词的宾语,则该介词可以在句首,也可以在句尾。如：What do you want a computer for? = For what do you want a computer? (你干嘛要一台电脑呢？)
▲反意疑问句： 反意疑问句表示对陈述句所说的事实提出相反的疑问,要求对方用?yes?或?no?来进行回答。
1) 构成：由两部分组成：前一部分是陈述句,后一部分是疑问句,它是由be ,have, 助动词或情态动词+主语构成。如果陈述句是肯定结构,反意疑问句须用否定结构；反之,陈述句如果是否定结构,反意疑问句须用肯定结构。反意疑问句的两部分,必须保持人称和时态的一致；反意疑问句的回答有时会和汉语不同。 陈述句部分 附加问句部分 注 意 点
肯定陈述句 否定的简短一般问句 当陈述句部分含有?是?动词、(?有?动词)、情态动词和助动词时,简短问句中沿用该词；否则就使用do/does//did. 否定陈述句 肯定的简短一般问句
如：He is old, isn’t he? (他老了不是吗？) / The man went away, didn’t he? (那个男人走开了不是吗？) / He isn’t old, is he? (他不老是吗？) / He never went there, did he? (他从没有去过那里是吗？)
2) 反意问句的回答：
无论哪种形式的反意问句,回答时要遵循：?Yes,+肯定式?或者?No,+否定式? 如：The man went away, didn’t he?(那人走开了,不是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(是的,他走了。)/ No, he didn’t.(不,他没有走。) The man never went there, did he?(这人从来不去那里,是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(不是呀,他去的。)/ No, he didn’t.(是呀,他不去。) ▲选择疑问句：提出两种或两种以上情况,需要对方作出选择回答的疑问句叫选择疑问句。
1) 构成：(1) 一般疑问句 + or + 第二选项？
(2) 特殊疑问句 + 第一选项(+ 第二选项)+ or + 第三选项？
2)选择疑问句的结构与特殊疑问句相同,即要具体回答,不可以用yes / no回答。如：
Is your friend a boy or a girl? –A girl. (----你的朋友是男孩还是女孩？----是女孩。) / Which do you prefer, coffee or tea? –Tea, please. (---你要哪一样咖啡还是茶？----请来茶吧。) / Which do you like best, singing, dancing or skating? --Dancing, of course. (----唱歌、跳舞和溜冰你最喜欢哪样？----当然是跳舞啦！)
5、祈使句：祈使句用来表示请求、命令等。它的主语you往往不说出。
▲祈使句的肯定式： 动词(原形) + 其他 如：Please give me a hand. (请帮忙) / Shut up! (住嘴！)
▲祈使句的否定式： Don’t +动词原形 + 其他 如：Please don’t talk in low voices. (请不要低声讲话。) / Don’t look back! (不要掉头看。)
[注意] 以?let’s?引出的祈使句的否定结构,?not?应放在?let’s?后面。如：Let’s not trouble him. (我们不要打扰他。)
肯定祈使句前可以用助动词来强调语气。如：Please do help me! (请千万帮帮
我。)
6、感叹句：感叹句用来表示喜怒哀乐等强烈感情。句末常用?！?
▲对含有形容词的名词短语感叹的结构通常是：
What + (a /an) + (形容词) +名词+ 陈述句结构(主谓语) ,用来强调句子中的名词,如：What a good, kind girl (she is)! (她是多么善良的好女孩！) / What bad weather (it is)! (天气真糟糕！)
▲仅对形容词或副词进行感叹的结构通常是：How + 形容词/副词 + 陈述句结构(主谓语) ,用来强调句子中的形容词、副词或动词。How carefully the old man walks! (这老人走路真小心！) / How delicious the food is! (这食品真好吃！) / How beautiful! (真美呀！)
▲有时,陈述句、祈使句、疑问句、一个词或词组,也带有一定的感情色彩,也可以成为感叹句,此时未必使用感叹句型。He is sitting on a tiger’s back! (他坐在老虎的背上！) / A nice shot! (漂亮一击！) / Good goal! (好球！)
十一、句子成分：主语、谓语、宾语、表语、定语、宾语补足语和状语
1、主语：
(1)由名词、代词(人称代词用主格)、动词不定式、动名词等充当,说明动作是?谁?发出的。如：The painter painted a very nice picture. (画家画了一幅漂亮的画。) / They fought against SARS bravely. (他们勇敢地与非典搏斗。) / To see is to believe. (耳听为虚眼见为实). / Helping animals is to help people. (帮助动物就是帮助人类。)
(2)动词不定式或动名词做主语时可用it代替,而不定式或动名词移至表语或宾语之后。如：It is very comfortable to have a Class A seat during the long journey. (在长途旅行中能有个甲等座位简直太舒服了。) / Eating too much is bad for your health.(=It is bad for your health eating too much.) (吃得太多对你的身体不利。)
(3)口语中常见主语或?主--系?省略：(It is) nothing. ((那)没有什么。)/ (It) doesn’t matter. ((那)没有关系。) / (I) thank you. ((我)谢谢你。)
(4)反意问句的附加问句,主语必须是代词：The man looks worried,doesn’t he? (这个人看上去很着急不是吗？) / Tigers are dangerous animals, aren’t they? (老虎是危险的动物不是吗？)
(5)祈使句一般省略主语。加主语时往往用来指定某个人。Keep the keyboards clean, children. (孩子们请保持键盘的清洁。) (省略了主语) / You go there and fetch me a glass of water. (你去给我弄一杯水来。)
(6)主语一般在句首,但在问句中会处于第二位和句尾；倒装句及there be句型主语在动词之后。如：Computers are made in this factory. (计算机生产于这家工厂。) / Where are they? (他们在哪儿？) / Does the boy like staying home? (这个男孩喜欢呆在家里吗？)
(7)主语与谓语必须保持单、复数的一致, 而谓语与表语或宾语之间没有这一要求。Neither Jim nor Rose has passed the exam. (Jim和Rose都没有通过考试。) / The Chinese people are a hardworking and brave people. (中华民族是一个勤劳勇敢的民族。)
(8)主语可以由从句充当,详见?主语从句?。
2、谓语：
(1)由?不及物动词?、?及物动词+宾语?或?系动词+表语?等构成,说明主语所表示的人物?干什么?或?怎么样?。如：
He travelled in space for the first time.(他首次在太空旅行。) / Who teaches you English this year?(今年谁教你们的英语？) / The pizza has gone bad. (那块烤馅饼已经变坏。) /
(2)谓语动词必须反映出人称、单复数、时态等信息,谓语动词往往由下列词语依序排列构成：［情态动词］+［时态助动词］+［语态助动词］+［主要动词］(不一定全部出现)。(见动词的时态和语态构成表) 记住：谓语部分第一个动词往往是变形动词。如：
I am sorry I am making so much noise but I have to. (对不起我发出了太大的声音但是只能这样。) / He can’t have finished reading the 800-page-long novel. (他不可能读完了那本长达800页的小说。) / Something must be done to stop the fowl flu from spreading out. (该采取措施防止 禽流感蔓延。)
(3)谓语动词切忌用?行为动词1 + 原形动词?、?be + 原形动词?。 记住使用下列正确形式：
⒈情态动词+原形动词。如：You’d better go over the lesson.（你最好复习这一课。）
⒉shall/ will/ would+原形动词。如：They should have been there once.（他们应该去过那儿。）
⒊be+现在分词或者过去分词。如：What are you doing this evening?（今晚你打算做什么？）/ Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（自从20世纪70年代大批树木被砍伐。）
⒋have+过去分词。如：Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（意思同上）
⒌一般时问句和否定句中：do/does/did+原形动词。如：He does not enjoy himself very much.（他日子过的不好。）/ Did any of you see dinosaur eggs?（你们当中有谁见过恐龙蛋吗？）
⒍行为动词1+行为动词2 (不定式、动名词、现在分词、过去分词等形式)。如：He made up his mind to be a vet.（他拿定主意要做个兽医。）/ Feeling good about yourself is essential to feeling good about life.（自尊自爱是享受生活的根本。）/ They wake up the other family members, calling,?Merry Christmas!?（他们叫醒家庭的其他成员,呼喊着：圣诞快乐！）/ The kings of ancient Egypt had strong tombs built for themselves.（古代的埃及国王让人给他们自己修建坚固的坟墓。）
(4)不可用形容词、名词、代词、副词、介词短语等独立作谓语,必须在此之前加连系动词。
(5)谓语动词单复数形式：单数形式的动词有：is,was,has,does以及?动词+s?；复数形式的动词有：are,were,have以及动词原形。其他动词不分单、复数。 谓语部分第一个动词的形式 单数形式 复数形式
一般现在时be(是)动词；
现在某些时态和语态的助动词be am (单一); are (单二); is (单三); are
一般过去时be(是)动词；
过去某些时态和语态的助动词be was (单一); were (单二); was;(单三) were
一般现在时have(有)动词；
现在完成时态的助动词have have (单一); have (单二); has (单三); have
一般现在时行为动词和助动词do do (单一、单二); does (单三) do 实意动词和连系动词的一般现在时动词（否定和疑问句除外） 原形动词(单
一、单二); 动词+s /es (单三) 原形动词
其他各时态语态的谓语动词 单复数形式相同
记住：主语、谓语单复数必须保持一致。（参见?4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题：?） Air and water is necessary to us all.(空气和水对于我们大家是必不可少的。)
(6)一般问句和反意问句的回答不使用行为动词,应该使用?是?动词、情态动词、助动词(be,will,have,do以及变形)。如：The Olympic Games is held every other year, isn’t it? ----Yes, it is.(奥运会每两年举办一次,是吗？----是的。)
3、宾语：
(1) 由名词、代词(人称代词要用宾格)、不定式、动名词、(宾语)从句充当,表示动作的承受者是?谁?或者是?何物?。如： The angel also came to Joseph and told him the same thing.(那个天使同样来到约瑟夫面前并且告诉他同样的事情。)(代词和名词充当两个宾语) / He told me that the company could not afford to pay him so much money.(他告诉我说公司付不起他那么多的钱。)(不定式作宾语) / They enjoy watching football games so much that they often forget their lessons.(他们如此喜爱看足球以至于常常忘记了他们的功课。)(动名词作宾语) / I think to be a children’s doctor is very rewarding.(我认为当个儿童医生是很值得的。)(从句作宾语)
(2) 只有及物动词或介词才有宾语,不及物动词没有宾语,如果涉及到事物,则必须在不及物动词后面加合适的介词。Listen to the radio. (listen不是及物动词,故加to。) / Can you hear anything exciting?(你能听到什么令人兴奋的消息吗？)
(3) 宾语一般放在及物动词或介词的后面,但是在疑问句中,如果宾语是疑问词,则宾语要放在句首。介词的宾语如果是疑问词,则可以放在介词后或句首。如：What did he see? (他看见了什么？) / What does he write a letter with? (他用什么写的信？) / With what does he write a letter? (他用什么写的信？)
(4)?动词+副词+宾语?结构中,如果宾语是代词,则代词必须放在?动??副?之间。如：Please put the shoes away. (请把鞋子收起来。) / Please put away the shoes. (请把鞋子收起来。) / Please put them away. (请把它们收起来。)
(5) 动词后面跟双宾语时可以采用两种结构：
⒈动词+间接宾语(人)+直接宾语(物)。如：He often gives me some help. (他常常帮我。)
⒉动词+直接宾语+介词+间接宾语。注意,一般情况介词用to,但动词是make, buy, borrow时,介词用for.如： Please make me a kite. (请给我做个风筝。)或Please make a kite for me.
(6) 在?动词+宾语+宾补?结构中,如果宾语是不定式、动名词、宾语从句,则常用it做形式宾语,而将实际的宾语移到补语后面去。如：I found the job rather difficult. (我发觉这个工作相当难做。) / I found it rather difficult to do the job.
(7) 宾语可以由从句充当,详见?宾语从句?。
4、表语：
(1) 说明主语的身份、性质、状况等含义的成分,通常由形容词、副词、介词短语、名词、代词等充当。如：He became a doctor after he left high school.(高中毕业他当上了医生。) / The rubber wheels are over there.(橡胶轮子在那边。) / He does not feel like eating anything today because he has caught a bad cold.(他今天不想吃任何东西因为他得了重感冒。) / Who is it?(谁呀？)
(2) 表语只能放在连系动词(如：be,look,become,turn get,grow,feel,seem) 之后,对表语进行提问的句子除外。
(3) 代词做表语一般用主格,口语中常用宾。如：It’s I. (It’s me.)是我。
(4) 只能作表语的形容词有：sorry,afraid,alone,asleep,awake,ill,well,sure,interested等等。He was terribly sorry for his carelessness.(他很为他的粗心而歉疚。) / Please make no noise here; the baby is asleep.(请不要发出响动,婴儿正熟睡呢。) / I am only interested in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all!(我只是对独坐孤舟无所事事感兴趣。) / I am not alone in thinking so.(并非只有我才这样想的。)
(5) 表语也可以由从句充当,详见?表语从句?。
5、定语：
(1) 修饰名词或代词的成分,常由形容词、名词(含所有格)、代词(物主、指示、疑问、不定)、介词短语、不定式(短语)充当,在初三阶段还学习了定语从句做定语的知识。如：Put it in the top drawer.(把它放在最上层的抽屉里。) / France and Switzerland are European countries. (法国和瑞士是欧洲国家。) / His mother and father are both college teachers.(他的父母都是大学教师。) / This is the day that I can never forget in my life.(这是我一辈子难忘的日子。)
(2) 单词做定语时一般放在被修饰的名词前面,而且有一定的次序： 冠词/
物代 年龄/形状/
大小/温度 色彩 来源 质地/
材料 目的/
用途 被修饰的名词(中心词)
a
the
my
his
… old,young,… red,
yellow,
blue,
… Chinese,
English,
American,
… wooden,
woolen,
glass,
silk,
paper
… meeting,
tennis,
sports,
reading,
swimming,
… box,
shoes,
room,
pig
…
long,short,
round, square…
big, large,
small, little…
hot, cold,
warm, cool…
(3) 时间副词(now,then,today,yesterday,...)、地点副词(here,there,back,in,out,home,...作定语时放在被修饰的名词后面。如：I could not find my way out, so I stayed there all along. (我找不到出去的路,所以就一直呆在那儿。)
(4) 介词短语修饰名词时只能放在名词的后面：The monkey in the cage was caught yesterday. (笼子里的猴子是昨天逮着的。)
(5) 形容词修饰复合不定代词时,往往后臵。如：He remembered everything unusual. (他记得所有不寻常的事情。)
(6) 定语还可以用从句充当,详见 定语从句。
(7) 注意：由于定语属于修饰性的成分,因此它常归入主语、宾语、表语之中,不作为句子的主要成分。
6、状语：
(1) 说明动作?何时?、?何地?、?如何?发生,或者说明形容词或副词的程度,一般由副词、介词短语、不定式、状语从句等充当。如：I was not born yesterday.（我又不是昨天才出世的娃娃。）/ For many of these families a college education was something new.（对其中的许多家庭来说,大学教育是件新事物。）/ He woke up to find his house on fire.(他醒来发现房子着火了。) / You cannot leave until your work is finished.(在你的工作被完成以前你不能离开)
(2) 副词作状语位臵较为灵活,详见《六?2》?副词在句子中的位臵以及作用?；介词短语作状语,位臵基本固定,详见《七?4》?介词短语在句子中的位臵?；不定式作状语,一般表示目的、结果,详见《八?7》?动词的非谓语形式?；从句作状语,详见《主从复合句》的?状语从句?。
(3) 多个状语相连时,一般先单词、后短语,先地点、后时间,先小概念、后大概念。如：He went ouf of the room at a quarter to 23:00 last night and then disappeared into the dark.(他昨夜22点3刻从房间里出来,然后消失在黑暗之中。) /
(4) 状语还可以用从句来充当,有时间状语从句、地点状语从句、原因状语从句、目的状语从句、结果状语从句、比较状语从句、让步状语从句、条件状语从句等。详见?状语从句?。
(5) 注意：由于状语属于修饰性的成分,常归入谓语,因此不作为句子的主要成分。
7、宾语补足语：
(1) 补充说明宾语的动作、状态的成分为宾语补足语,常由名词、形容词、动词非谓语形式(不定式、现在分词、过去分词等)、介词短语等充当。如：Call him Jim, please. (请叫他Jim。) / I tried my best to make him happy. (我竭尽所能让他开心。) / Ask her to come to dinner tomorrow. (请他明天来。) / He let the smaller animals bring food to him. (他让小动物们给他带食物来。)
(2) 部分表示位臵、方向的副词也可以作宾语补足语。如：Let him in, I tell you! (我跟你说,让他进来！)/ Please put it away. (请把它收起来。)
(3) 不定式或分词作宾语补足语的情况,详见《八?7》?动词的非谓语形式?相关内容。
十二、简单句五种基本句型：
句子包含主要句子成分(主语、谓语)和次要句子成分(表语、宾语、宾语补足语),按照动词的性质将英语简单句划分为以下五种基本句型：
1、基本句型的词序： 2、划分符号(没有统一规定,仅供参考)：
3、例句：Jim is working [very hard] [now].（他现在正非常努力地工作。） She is young. （她年轻。） It looks like rain. （天看上去要下雨。）
The boy [always] kicked the dog [with his feet]. （这男孩老是用脚踢那只狗。）
He has [never] bought me a toy [since last year]. （从去年起他没给我买过一个玩具。）
He felt something (cold) <moving up his leg>.（他感到有个冰冷的东西顺着腿上爬。）
4、英语词类与句子成分关系图：
句子成分 词类或短语 主语* 谓语 宾语* 表语* 定语* 状语* 宾语
补足语
名词 √√√ × √√√ √√ √ × √
代词 √√√ × √√√ √√ √√ × ×
形容词 × × × √√√ √√√ × √√
数词 √ × √ √ √√√ × √
动
词 时态语态形式 × √√√ × × × × ×
动词不定式 √√ × √√ √ √ √√ √√√
动名词 √√ × √√√ √ √ × ×
动词现在分词 × × × √ √ √√ √√√
动词过去分词 × × × √ √ √√ √√
副词 × × × √ √ √√√ √
介词短语 × × × √√ √ √√ √
[注释] 1、?√?表示某种词类可以充当某个成分, ?√√?表示某种词类经常充当某个成分, ?√√√?表示某种词类最经常充当某个成分。 ?×?表示某种词类不能充当某个成分。
2、? * ?表示该成分可以由从句充当,如主语从句、宾语从句、状语从句等。
十三、并列复合句
1、基本概念：
并列复合句是由两个或两个以上并列而又独立的简单句构成。两个简单句常由并列连接词连在一起；但有时不用连接词,只在两个简单句之间用一逗号或分号。
2、常见的并列句：
(1) 用来连接两个并列概念的连接词有and , not only…but also…, neither…nor…等,and所连接的前后分句往往表示先后关系、递进关系。前后分句的时态往往保持一致关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来时。
(2) 表示在两者之间选择一个, 常用的连接词有or,otherwise,or else,either…or…等,前后分句的时态往往保持一致关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来时。
(3) 表明两个概念彼此有矛盾、相反或者转折, 常用的连接词有but,yet,still ,however等,前后分句时态一致。
(4) 说明原因, 用连接词for ,前后分句时态一致。
(5) 表示结果,用连接词so, 前后分句时态一致。
十四、主从复合句
1、概念：
主从复合句由一个主句和一个或一个以上的从句构成。主句为句子的主体,从句只用作句子的一个次要成分,不能独立成为一个句子。从句通常由关联词引导,并由关联词将从句和主句联系在一起。如：While the grandparents love the children, they are strict with them.(爷爷奶奶们很爱孩子,同时对他们也严格要求。) / It seemed as if the meeting would never end.(看起来会议没完没了。) / Hurry up, or (else) you'll be late.(快点, 要不然就来不及了。) / However I cook eggs, the child still refuses to eat them.(不管我用什么方法煮鸡蛋,小孩还是不肯吃。)
2、分类：
从句按其在复合句中的作用,分为主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句、定语从句和状语从句等。（参见以下各条）
3、各从句在句子中的位臵以及用法：
(1) 表语从句：在句子中作连系动词的表语的从句,它位于主句中的系动词之后。 例如：That is why he did not come to school yesterday. / It is because you are so clever.
(2) 宾语从句：在句子中作及物动词或介词的宾语。
⒈基本形式：（主句＋）连词+从句主语+从句谓语+...
⒉ 关于宾语从句连词的选择：
若从句来源于一个陈述句,那么,连词用that,在口语中that可以省略; 若从句来源于一个一般疑问句,连词则用if 或whether;
若从句来源于一个特殊疑问句,则连词就是疑问词(如what,who,where,when等)
例如：They believe that the computer will finally take the place of human beings.(他们相信计算机终将代替人类。) (从句本来就是陈述句)/ I wonder whether I should say something for him to the headmaster. (我不知道是不是该为他在校长跟前说点什么。) (从句来源于一般问句Shall I say something for him to the headmaster?) / He asked me where he could get such medicine. (他问我在哪儿能搞到那样的药。) (从句来源于特殊问句Where can he get such medicine? )
⒊ 宾语从句的时态问题：如果主句是现在时,从句则用现在某一时态,甚至可以用过去时；
如主句是过去时,从句则相应地使用过去某一时态,遇到客观真理时仍然用现在时。如：I think I will do better in English this term. (我想本学期我的英语会学得好点。) / The teacher asked the boy if the earth is round. (老师问那个男孩地球是不是圆的。)
⒋ 下列结构后面的从句一般也作为宾语从句看待：
be sorry / afraid / sure / glad +that从句,如：I’m sorry I’m late. (对不起,我迟到了。) / I’m afraid he isn’t in at the moment. (恐怕他此刻不在家。)
(3) 状语从句：在复合句中作状语,其位臵可以在主句前或主句后。状语从句可以分为时间、地点、原因、目的、结果、比较、让步、条件等几种。状语从句由从属连接词引导。
时间状语从句通常由when ,as ,while, after, before, since, as soon
as ,since, till (until), while, whenever 等引导。时间状语从句一般放在句首或句尾,特别注意,时间状语从句不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。如： When you finish the work, you may go out to play with Sam. (你完成工作就可以出去和Jim一起玩了。) / I won’t leave until Mum comes back. (妈妈回来了我才会走。)
地点状语从句通常由 where, wherever等引导。如：Go back where you came from! (哪里来还滚到哪里去！) / I will never forget to catch the thief who stole my necklace wherever he may be. (我永远也不会忘记去抓住那个偷我项链的贼,无论他会在哪里。)
原因状语从句通常由because, since, as等引导,一般放在句首或句尾。如：He went abroad because his father had found a good university for him. (他出国了,因为他父亲给他找了一所好大学。)
目的状语从句通常由so that..., so...hat..., in order that... 等引导,往往放在句尾,从句中通常含有can / could / may / might等情态动词。如：He got up earlier so that he could catch the first train. (他起身更早为的是赶上第一班车。)
结果状语从句通常由 so that..., so...that... 等引导,放在句尾。结果状语从句一般表示已经发生的事情,故多为过去时态。如：He lost so many bikes that he decided never to buy a new one. (他丢了那么多辆自行车,他决定再也不买新车了。)
比较状语从句通常由as, than, as (so)...as等引导,一般省略从句的谓语部分,只剩下名词或代词(用主格或宾格均可)。如：Jane is much taller than I/me. (Jane比我高多了。) / I don’t have as many books as you (do). (我书没有你多)
让步状语从句通常由though (although), as, even if( even though), however, whatever等引导。如：Even if you pay the debt(债务) for me, I will not thank you because it has nothing to do with me. (即使你替我还了债我也不会感谢你,因为它与我毫无关系。) / He wears a T-shirt though it is very cold. (他穿了一件T恤衫,尽管天很冷。)
条件状语从句通常由if, unless, as long as等引导,条件状语从句一般放在句首或句尾,特别注意,时间状语从句不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。You will certainly fail in the coming final exams unless you work much harder. (即将来到的期末考试你肯定考不及格,除非你更用功。) / If it doesn’ t rain tomorrow, we shall go hiking. (如果明天不下雨我们就要去徒步旅行。)
[注意] 1、because与so；(al)though与but；if与so不可以同在一个句子中成对出现。
2、时间、条件、原因,让步状语从句放在句首时需要用逗号与主句隔开。
(4) 定语从句：在复合句中作定语用修饰句子中某一名词或代词的从句叫定语从句。
⒈ 定语从句的位臵：放在名词或代词的后面。如：The man who has an umbrella in his hand is my uncle. (手上抓了一把雨伞的人是我的叔叔。)
⒉ 语法术语的改变：被修饰的名词或代词称为先行词；引导定语从句的连接词称为关系词,其中that、which、who称为关系代词,where、when、how称为关系副词。
⒊ 关系代词或关系副词的作用：
关系代词who、whom 和whose指人,分别在从句中作主语、宾语和定语。which指物that多指物, 有时也指人,它们在从句中可以作主语或宾语。定语从句中关系代词作从句宾语时可以省略。This is the thief (that/who/whom) we have been looking for these days. (这个就是我们近日一直在找的小偷。) / Please find a room which is big enough for all of us to live in. (请找一间足够大能住下我们全体的房间。)
关系副词when或where引导定语从句时,它们在从句中分别作时间状语和地点状语。如：This is the room where they had a quarrel a week ago. (这是一个星期前他们吵架的房间。) / I can never forget the day when I first saw you. (我永远不会忘记第一次见到你的日子。)
⒋ 限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。限制性定语从句在句中不能省略,否则主句意思就不完整。非限制性定语从句和主句之间往往用逗号分开,这种从句是一种附加说明,如果从句子中省去,也不致于影响主句的意思。如：She spent the whole evening talking about her latest book, which none of us had heard of. (她一个晚上都在谈论她最近的书,我们一个人都没有听说过那本书。)
[注解]
1、关系代词只能用that的情况：当先行词是指事物的不定代词(all, anything等),或先行词部分含有最高级,或含有序数词时,不能用其他的关系代词,只能用that. 如：All that Lily told me seems untrue. (Lily告诉我的话似乎不真实。) / Can you give me anything that has no sugar inside? (能不能给我点里面没有糖的东西？) / This is the first two-story bus that runs in our city. (这是第一辆运行于我市的双层公交车。)
2、关系代词在从句中作主语时一般用who(指人)、that(指物),而不用that指人或用which指物。 如：Do you know the woman who is weeping in the corner? (你认识那个在角落里哭泣的女人吗？) / Do not tell me any words that have nothing to do with me. (跟我无关的话,请一个字也不要说。)
3、关系代词作从句的宾语时,常用which或whom,较少使用that或who,而且,关系代词常常省略。如：Tom’s father was the first parent whom our teacher talked to. (Tom的父亲是我们老师第一个谈话的人。)
4、当关系代词紧跟在介词后面时,必须用which或whom,而当介词移到句尾时,则又可以使用that或who. 如：This is the room in which Miss Li once lived. (= This is the room Miss Li once lived in.) (这是李小姐曾经居住过的房间。)
(5) 主语从句：在句子中充当句子主语的从句叫主语从句。位于谓语动词之前。通常由that,whether以及疑问连词引导。一般情况下,常用it替代主语从句,而将主语从句移到句尾。如：When we should start is still a question. (我们该在什么时候开始还是个问题呢。)
十五、直接引语和间接引语(初中不作特别要求)
1、直接引语和间接引语：在陈述句中,直接引用说话人原来的语句,称为直接引语。在书写时,直接引语用引号。用自己的词语来转述表达原来说话人说的内容,称为间接引语。
2、直接引语改变为间接引语：
1、直接引语如果是陈述句,变为间接引语时应注意以下各点：
⒈不用引号,而用连接词that,但有时可省略。
⒉人称作相应变化；
⒊主句里的动词如果是过去时,间接引语中的时态一般应作相应改变： 一般现在时变一般过去时；一般将来时变过去将来时；现在进行时变过去进行时；现在完成时变成过去完成时；一般过去时变成过去完成时；但一般过去时如与一个具体的过去时间连用,则时态不变。
如：He says,"I am not from the USA.?→He says that he is not from the USA.
Mr Smith said to his girl friend,? I haven’ t seen you for a long time.? →Mr Smith said to his girl friend that he had not seen her for a long time.
2、直接引语如果是一般疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用从属连接词whether或if引导,词序要改变。如：Lin Tao said to Miss Green, "Is it made in China?? →Lin Tao asked Miss Green if it was made in China.
3、直接引语如果是特殊疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用疑问词引导,词序是：连词+主语+谓语。
如：Lucy said to me, ?How can I help?? →Lucy asked me how she could help.
4、直接引语如是祈使句,变间接引语时,须将祈使句变为动词不定式,并在动词不定式前用tell, ask, order. 如：He said to the little boy,? Come here, young man! ?
→He asked the little boy to go there.
5、直接引语变为间接引语时,指示代词以及表示时间和地点的词或词组应作相应变化：
在直接引语中 在间接引语中
十六、倒装句： 谓语的一部分或者全部放在主语之前的句子称为倒装句。
1、THERE BE句型以及以here、there开头的句子。如： There are a lot of children in the showroom. (在展览室里有许多的小孩。)/ Here comes the bus.
(公交车来了。) / There goes the bell. (铃响了。) / The door opened and in came Mr Lee. (门开了,李先生走了进来。)
2、用?So / Nor / Neither + 助动词 + 主语?倒装结构表示第二个人物的情况与上文的人物情况相同。如：Tom went to the beach last week, and, so did I. (Tom上个星期去了海滩,我也是。) / Li Mei’s bought nothing from the shop. Neither has Jim. (李梅没有在店里买什么,Jim也没有买。)
3、在疑问句中,通常使用在主语之前安放助动词的倒装方法,对主语提问除外。如：How did he find the lost book? (他是怎么样找到丢失的书的？) / Where are they going to spend the summer vacation? (他们打算到哪儿过暑假？)
4、感叹句中通常将被感叹的部分前移,而将句子的主谓语整体后臵。 如：What a beautiful flower (it is)! (那是多漂亮的花！)
5、有引号引用某人的原话时,引号外面的主谓一般采用倒装形式放在句尾,但是,若主语是代词则不倒装。如：?What on earth are you doing up there?? said the father. (父亲说：?你在上边到底干什么？?) / ?What on earth are you doing up there??he said. (他说：?你在上边到底干什么？?)
十七、附加注释
die、dead、death的用法：die是动词,可以独立做谓语,有各种时态变化,也可以变成非谓语形式作句子的其他成分；dead是形容词,作句子的定语、表语或宾语补足语；death是名词,作句子的主语、宾语等。如：I’m going to die! (我要死了！) / The man has been dead for about three months. (那个人死了三个月左右。) / He is worried to death. (他急得要死。)
新目标初中英语总复习资料精品讲义
八种动词时态，有的只要求达到理解层次，有的则要求达到熟练运用层次。至少其中五种时态包括过去进行时是要求达到熟练运用层次的，而且其考查方式肯定不会以某一时态的独立形式出现，而是时态的综合运用，尤其要重视各种时态之间的区别。
找出它们之间的不同冠词的用法.
现以冠词为例：
1.John was given _______ orange bag for his birthday but ______ bag was lost just now.
A.an,a B.a,the C.the,a D.an,the
2.There's ________ old tree near _______ house. A.a,an B.an,the
C.a,the D.the,a
3.There is ___ 800-metre-long road behind ___ hospital.A.an,an B.a,a
C.an,the D.a,the
4._______ good,kind girl she is! A.How B.What a C.What D.How a
5.________ bad weather!I hope it won't last long. A.How B.What
C.What a D.How a
6._______ they are listening to the teacher!
A.How careful B.What careful C.How carefully D.What carefully 由上例题我们可以发现冠词和感叹句是必考内容。同样，象宾语从句的语序、代词的格、主谓语一致、动词和介词的搭配、近义词的比较以及习惯表达法和情态动词的使用等，无一不在考查之列。 所有这一切语言基础知识，我都将通过对典型试题的解题分析，展开讨论，分层展示难易对比，系统归纳。 对于语言基础知识是这样处理，那么对以能力测试为主要目的的中考其他试题形式又该怎么办呢？ 这里我们以一篇完形填空题为例：
A poor farmer had never left his small village.After he(1) a lot of money,he decided to spend a holiday in an expensive hotel(旅馆)in a bigtown.(2)lunch time came on his first day there,he went to eat in the restaurant(餐馆)of the hotel(3) his new clothes.The head waiter(服务员)(4)him to the table,took his order and went away.When he turned and
(5)the farmer again,he had a (6)!The farmer had tied(系)his table cloth round his (7).
The head waiter told another waiter to go to the farmer and (8) him that people (9) do such a thing in his restaurant.So the waiter went tothe farmer and said in a (10) voice(声音),"Good morning,sir.Would you like a haircut?"
1.A.lent B.made C.paid D.gave
2.A.During B.Though C.When D.Because
3.A.for B.with C.on D.in
4.A.wanted B.put C.showed D.brought
5.A.looked at B.watched C.saw D.found
6.A.look B.rest C.table cloth D.surprise
7.A.arm B.neck C.hand D.head
8.A.ask B.tell C.taught D.told
9.A.can't B.don't C.won't D.mustn't
10.A.friendly B.tired C.sad D.ter
要求考生从所给的选项中选出正确答案，使补足后的短文意思通顺，结构完整。对此，考生必须通篇考虑，不能拿来就做，那样必然顾此失彼，前后意思不得连贯。目前的中考完型还侧重于语法，这将在逐年试题的变革中转向按上下文的要求来推断理解。
在解这类题时，必须掌握?词感现象?，注意学会区分?干扰项?。所谓词感，?the sense of word"是指一种对词或词群的感受能力。对词的感受力强，在解题时会较为容易地找到它与情景的关系。词感并不仅仅指词与词之间的细微差异，也并不注重词的搭配与组合，它较多地强调选用恰当的词，以利于对情景作出合乎逻辑的判断。同时也就把其它三个作为干扰项的选择项排除掉了。最后复读一篇全文，就会语感流畅，句意明确。
这儿举例的目的是想说明，我从一个较高的立意来对中考题型，特别是完形、阅读等，进行分析、探讨，借以使同学们获得较为完整的解题思路和解题方法。 词汇（一）
这一讲里，主要帮助同学们掌握名词、冠词、数词的用法，特别是针对同学不易掌握的方面。
一、名词 关于名词，我们必须掌握名词的数，名词的格。
单数可用a、an来修饰可数名词单数，在元音发音开头的单词前用an，而不是a
1.复数的构成方法：(1)一般在复数名词后加s，如：dog--dogs。
(2)以s、x、ch、sh结尾的名词加es，如：watch--watches。
(3)以辅音字母加y结尾的名词，变y为i加es， 如：country--countries。 请区别：如果是元音字母加y结尾的名词，则只须加s。 如：monkey--monkeys。
(4)以o结尾的名词，只有potato(土豆)，tomato(西红柿)加es构成复数。
(5)以f、fe结尾的名词，变f、fe为v再加es， 如：knife--knives。
2.单复数形式相同的词：sheep--sheep，fish--fish Chinese--Chinese，Japanese--Japanese
3.特殊变化的单词有：(1)tooth--teeth，foot--feeth
(2)man--men，woman--women，policeman--policemen,Frenchman--Frenchmen 请区别：German(德国人)—Germans (3)child—children
4.常以复数形式出现的名词：people(人)，clothes(衣服)，trousers(裤子) glasses(眼镜) ,这些名词作主语时，同学们应特别注意它们的谓语，用复数。 如：My clothes are (be) newer than yours.
5.有些名词看似复数形式，实际上是单数。这一点是同学不易掌握的，应特别加以记忆。如：news(消息)，maths(数学)，physics(物理) No news is good news.
6.可用how many，many，a few，few，a lot of，lots of，some，any等来修
饰可数名词复数。 How many are there in your pencil-box?(knife) 不可数名词：1.常见的不可数名词有：water，rice，fish，meat，等。应特别记
medicine,news,work,homework,housework,money,chalk,weather,cotton,wood.
2.不可数名词无复数，作主语时常看成单数。如：Some bread__________over there.(be)
3.常用how much,much,a little,little,a lot of,some,any等来修饰不可数名词。
4.常用a piece of,a cup of等来表示不可数名词的量。如要表达?两片面包?这样的意义，bread仍为不可数名词，不加s，而piece则可加s。即：twopiecesof bread
请区别：可数名词也可用量来表示， 如：三箱苹果three boxes of apples 例： 1、These two pieces of bread __________over there.(be)
2、Could I have three ___________,please？
A.piece of bread B.piece of breads C.pieces of bread
D.pieces of breads
名词的格 名词所有格的构成方法，在名词后加? 's?。如：Tom→Tom's译为?…的?，若遇上以s结尾的复数名词，则在s后加? '?即可。如：Teachers'Day , twoweeks'holiday，而不以s结尾的复数名词的所有格，仍按惯例加's 。如：Children's Day
关于名词所有格，应掌握以下几点：
1.可用名词所有格表示地点。 如：my aunt's 我姑姑家。 go to the doctor's 去医生家。
2.表示两人共同拥有，在最后一个名词后加's 如：Lucy and Lily's 露西
和莉莉的
3.掌握词组：a girl of five 一个五岁的女孩 a friend of mine 我的
一个朋友
eg;The white shirt is and blue one is . A、Kate,my B.Kate's,mine
C.Kate,mine D.Kate's,my
二、冠词
冠词是词汇中的基础的，也是简单的部分，所以同学们有必要掌握其基本用法，归纳起来，同学们应该掌握以下几点： 1.冠词指不定冠词a,an和定冠词the
2.不定冠词an常用于元音发音开头的词前，如：an hour,an English car. 请
区别：a useful machine
3.指上文提到过的人或物，用定冠词the
4.在世界上独一无二的事物前用定冠词the.如：the sun,the moon,the earth
5.定冠词the用于序数词前，表示方位的名词和形容词最高级前。如：the first,the best ,in the south
6.在复数姓氏前加the，表示××一家人，常看成复数。
如：The Browns are going to Shanghai for a holiday this summer.
7.在介词短语中常用定冠词the，如：in the box ,behind the chair
8.特别注意不能用定冠词the的几个方面：
(1)在节日、星期、月份、季节、年等词前不用冠词。如：in summer,in August 请区别：in the spring of 1945. (这里表示特指，故加the)
(2)一日三餐和球类运动名不用冠词。 如：have breakfast ,play football
(3)一些固定词组中，如：go to bed ,go to school,by bus ,at night.
9.在有些词组中，有冠词和无冠词意思不同，请注意区别：
in front of 在…前面 in the hospital 在医院里
in the front of 在…范围内的前部 in hospital (生病)住院
练习:There's _________800-metre-long road behind _________hospital.
A.an,an B.a, a C.an, the D.a, the
三、数词
同学们首先应会读会写所有基数词和序数词，以及与数词有关的钟点表达
法。对数词的考查，中考常采用单选题及听力题，这些题型归纳起来，应掌握以
下几点特别容易出错的地方。
1.基数词变序数词。其规律为：
1,2,3特殊记，加th从4起 (first,second,third,fourth)
8少t，9去e，千万别忘记 (eighth,ninth) 逢5逢12，ve变f (fifth,twelfth)
20到90，y要变ie (twentieth,ninetieth) 若是几十几，前基后序别倒位 (ninety-first)
2.hundred,thousand,million 在构成具体的数字时用单数形式。 如：five hundred people. 只有在表达笼统的多数时才加s，构成复数形式。
hundreds of 数以百计的，成百上千的 thousands of 数以千计的，成千上
万的
millions of 数百万的 这些词组前不能用具体数字。
3.序数词常与定冠词the 连用。
练习:⒈Henry has learned eight _________ French words this year.
A.hundred B.hundreds C.hundred of D.hundreds of
⒉The _________lesson is the most difficult one in Book Two. (twenty) 另外，同学们还应掌握与数词有关的钟点表达法。
顺读法(钟点＋分钟) 如：4:30 four thirty 4:45 four forty-five
4:15 four fifteen 倒读法(分钟＋to／past＋钟点) 如：4:30
half past four
4:15 fifteen past four／a quarter past four 4:45 fifteen to five
／a quarter to five
练习题 :
1.At the beginning of the_____(twenty) century,the world's population was
about 1700 million.
2.Are these_____(watch)yours? Yes.
3.You don't look well.You'd better go to the______(doctor) at once.
4.Would you give me________,please?
A.two papers B.two piece of paper C.two pieces of paper D.two
pieces of papers
5.There are three_____and seven____in the picture.
A.monkeys,sheeps B.monkeys,sheep C.monkies,sheep
D.monkies,sheeps
6.A lot of____are talking with two_______.
A.Germans,Frenchmans B.Germen,Frenchmans C.German, Frenchmen
D.Germans,Frenchmen
7.June 1 is __. A.the Children's Day B.the Childrens' Day
C.Children's Day D.Childrens' Day
8.__________people went out to see what had happened.
A.Thousands of B.Three thousand ofC.Thousand of D.Three thousands
9.We have been in the school for______.
A.three and a half month B.three and a half months
C.three month and a half D.three months and half
10.__________English is___________ useful language. A.A, an B./,
a C.The, an D. A, /
11.John was given _______ orange bag for his birthday but ______ bag was
lost just now.
A.an,a B.a,the C.the,a D.an,the
12.There's ________ old tree near _______ house. A.a,an B.an,the
C.a,the D.the,a
13.There is ________ 800-metre-long road behind _________
hospital.A.an,an B.a,a C.an,the D.a,the
四.代词
⒈人称代词: 主格: 单数I 、you 、he 、she 、it 复数 we 、you 、
they
宾格: 单数me 、you 、him 、her 、it 复数us 、you 、them
⑵物主代词: 形容词性 my 、your 、his 、her 、its 、our 、your 、their
名词性 mine 、yours 、his 、hers 、its 、ours 、yours 、theirs
⒊反身代词: myself 、yourself 、himself 、herself 、itself 、ourselves 、yourselves 、themselves
1.形容词性物主代词在句中只能作定语，相当于一个形容词，名词性物主代词在句中可作表语、主语和宾语，相当于一个名词。
2.注意名词性物主代词在句中所指代的关系,是单数还是复数。
如：⑴These books aren't ours. Ours are new. (这里ours=our books) ⑵This is not our room. Ours is over there. (这里ours=our room)
3."of+名词性物主代词"表示所属 如：a sister of his 他的一个妹妹 a friend of mine 我的一个朋友
4.人称代词在并列使用时的顺序为：?第二人称，第三人称，第一人称?。
如：You, she and I all enjoy the music.
5.关于反身代词，同学们须掌握其固定结构：
enjoy oneself=have a good time (过得很愉快) by oneself=alone (单独、独自)
help oneself to… (随便吃/喝 些...) learn sth. by oneself =teach oneself sth. (自学)
练习题
1.-Whose trousers are these? -_____, I think.
A.They B.Their C.Theirs D.Them
2. Nobody taught___English. He taught____. A.him, himself B.his, himself C.him, by himself D.his, his
（二） 修饰可数名词 many few 表否定意义 a few 表肯定意义
修饰不数名词 much little 表否定意义 a little 表肯定意义 few 和 little 与 quite 或 only 连用时，常加不定冠词 a.如:There are quite a few new books in the library.=
用little, a little, few, a few填空:
1.I often stay at home because I have _______ friends here.
2.Jim,don't go and get some water. There is ______ water in the glass.
3.Though he learned French only ________ weeks. He can speak very well.
4.Lily had _________ bread because she was hungry yesterday.
（三）不定代词: something, anything, nothing.
当形容词修饰这三个不定代词时，常后臵。 如：something new
There's __________ in today's newspaper. 中考题
A.important anything B.important something C.anything important
D.something important
(四)另外，还要注意代词some, every, all, both, either, another
1.some（一些，某） 一般用于肯定句中 注：some有时也可用于表示请求的疑问句中。
any（任何） 多用于疑问句和否定句
⒈ Will you give me some water? ⒉ Would you like some meat?
⒊ May I ask some questions? ⒋ Could I have some apples?
2.every＋单数名词 ?每一个? 强调共性，作定语,形式上为单数。
each ?每一个? 强调个性，作定语、主语、宾语和同位语，常与of连用。 如: Each student was asked to try again. Each of them has a nice skirt.
Every child likes playing games.
3.all ?(全部)都? 表示三者或三者以上，作同位语时，一般放在连系、助动
词之后，行为动词之前。
none ?没有?表示三者或三者以上都不，后常跟介词of
如： We are all from Canada. = All of us are from Canada.
None of us is/are afraid of dogs.（单、复数均可）
4.both ?（两者）都? ,作主语时，看作复数；作定语时，后跟名词复数。
either ?两者中任何一个? ,作主语时，谓语用第三人称单数;作定语时，后
跟名词单数。
neither ?(两者)都不?,含有否定意义，用法同either。
如：⒈They both swim well. ＝Both of them swim well.
⒉There are trees on both sides of the street. = There are trees on
either side of the street.
⒊Neither of us is going to Beijing next week.
⒋Neither answer is right.
5. another +单数名词, ?另一个?
one … the other ?一个……，另一个……?
the other +复数名词 = the others ?其他的人或物? （指确定范围内剩下的
全部） others ?别人?
(五)疑问代词 5个?wh?, 即who, whose, whom, what, which
这里，which是同学们不易掌握的内容，其实，同学们只须记住，对作定语的
内容提问，常用which.
例如: I like the red shirt. ___________ ___________ do you like ?
练习:
一、根据所给单词的适当形式填空，使句意通顺，语法完整
6．Can you come with us ?(we)
7．These skirts are hers . Yours are over there.(she)
8．Please take care of yourselves , boys and girls.(you)
9．I don't think this is my frisby, though it looks like mine .(I)
10．Look at those books. Are they yours?(that)
二、根据首字母填空
11．Is there anything interesting in the newspaper?
12．She asked us to help each other.
13．The old man can neither read nor write.
14．Nothing is difficult if you put your heart into it.
15．Please help yourself to some fish, Lucy.
三、同义句转换
16、A: The children played happily in the zoo yesterday.
B: The children enjoyed themselves in the zoo yesterday.
17、A: He doesn't like mutton, and she doesn't, either.
B: Neither he nor she likes mutton.
18、A: All the American people don't like sandwiches.
B: Not all the American people like sandwiches.
19、A: They don't often hear the twins sing the song in the school.
B: Neither of the twins is often heard to sing the song in the school.[ZK)]
四、单项选择
(C)20、-Can you speak Chinese, Peter?-Yes, but only .
A. little B. few C. a little D. a few
(A)21、-Do you like Jane's new skirt?
-Yes, very much. I'll ask mum to buy for me.
A. one B. it C. the other D. a
(B)22、The color of her skirt is different from of mine.
A. one B. that C. it D. this
(B)23、Students are usually interested in sports. Some like running, some like swimming. like ball games.
A. the others B. others C. the other D. other
(A)24、-I'll give the boys to eat.
-Oh, I know, fish and chips.
A. something English B. English somethingC. anything English D. English anything
(D)25、-Shall I help you with the heavy box?
-No, thanks, I can do it .
A. me B. my C. mine D. myself
(D)26、-What time shall we meet this afternoon,3:00 or 4:00? -I don't mind. time is OK.
A. Neither B. Each C. Any D. Either
(C)27、-My bag is full, what about ?
- is full, too.
A. you, Yours B. his, He C. yours, Mine D. hers, She
(D)28、-I've had enough bread, Would you like ?
-No, thanks.
A. a few more B. one more C. another more D. some more
(A)29、There are many trees on sides of the river.
A. both B. either C. neither D. each
(A)1、He has two bikes, one is new, is old.
A. the other B. other C. the others D. others
(C)2、Without the sun, could grow in the world.
A. anything B. something C. nothing D. everything
(B)3、 of them is going to play basketball with you this afternoon.
A. All B. Neither C. Some D. Both
(B)4、-Can you tell me what a panda looks like?
-Look! This is a picture of .
A. it B. one C. two D. some
(B)5、There are not many pears here, but you can take if you want to.
A. few B. a few C. a little D. little
二、形容词 副词
大多数的形容词、副词都有三个等级： 原级：比较级： 比较...，更...一些 最高级： 最...
（A）1.构成：(规则情况)情况 变 化 方 法 例 词
单音节词和少数双音节词: 一般情况 加er, est clever-cleverer-cleverest 以字母e结尾 加r, st nice-nicer-nicest
重读闭音节、末尾只有一个辅音字母时 双写加er, est big-bigger-biggest 以辅音字母加y结尾 变y为i加er, est early-earlier-earliest
部分双音节和多音节词 在词前加more, most slowly-more slowly-most slowly
2.不规则变化，须熟记： good/well-better-best many/much-more-most far-farther-farthest
bad/badly/ill-worse-worst little-less-least
(B)常见的使用情况
1.as … as … 和...一样（中间用原级）
2.not as(so) … as 和...不一样（中间用原级）
3… than …. ..比...（用比较级）
4.有范围修饰的用最高级 如:in, of, among或用从句修饰的
eg.⑴Winter is the coldest season of the year. ⑵This is the best film that I have ever seen .
5.比较级+and+比较级 意为?越来越….eg: wetter and wetter more and more beautiful
6. The+比较级，the+比较级 越…...就越…... eg:The more, the better. 越多越好
(C)注意点：1.形容词最高级前一定要用the,副词最高级前可省略。
2.可用much, a little, even, still等修饰比较级。
3.在比较级中为了避免重复，在than后常用one,that,those等词来替代前面提到过的名词。
eg:The weather here is warmer than that of Shanghai.
(D)掌握三种同义句转换：
1.He is taller than any other student in his class. =He is the tallest (student)in his class.
2.This film is less interesting than that one. =This film isn't as interesting as that one.
=That film is more interesting than this one.
3.I prefer maths to English. =I like maths better than English. Which do you like _____, fish, meat _____ eggs? A.best, or B.better,or
C.best, and D.better,and
此外，关于形容词、副词的内容同学们还须掌握：
1.形容词修饰名词作定语，跟在连系动词之后作表语。
2.副词修饰动词、形容词或其它副词 enough属例外词：形/副+enough to do enough+名词
例如;She is old enough to go to school. 她够上学的年龄了。
3.区别几组易混淆的副词: 也 too用于肯定、疑问句 also 较为正式书面语
either 用于否定句 已经 already 常用于肯定句、疑问句 yet 常用于否
定句、疑问句
不再 no (not any) longer 从时间上讲 no (not any) more 从动作上讲
如此这样 such 修饰名词 eg: such a big box
so 修饰形容词、副词 eg: so big 单独、独自 alone 作表语 =by
oneself 孤独的 lonely 可作表语、定语 eg:A group of girls are singing
and dancing ______ over there. (happy)
练习题
1.The students are having a good time in the park. Some are drawing by
the lake. _ are climbing the hill.
A.Others B. Other C. Another D.The other
2.There isn't _____ in today's newspaper.
A. important something B. important anything C. anything important
D. nothing important
3.-Whose watch is this, Mary? Is it your sister's?
-No,Mum. It's not ______. It's ______. A.hers, my B. her, my C. Mine,
hers D.hers, mine
4..The Changjiang River is the third __ river in the world. A.long
B.longer C.longest D.the longest
5. An elephant is _____ than a horse.
A.more strong B. much stronger C. the most strong D. much more strong
6. Which do you like _____, tea, orange or water? A.good B.Well C.
Better D. Best
一、 介词
1．与形容词搭配的词组有： be afraid of （怕） be angry with （生某人
的气）
be away from （不在某地） be different from （与…不同）
be good at （善于） be good/ bad for (对…有益/有害) be interested
in （对…感兴趣） be late for （迟到） be/get ready for （为作好
准备） be sure of (对…有把握)
be worried about （为…感到担忧）
2．介词后常用人称代词宾格和动词-ing形式
1)You must take good care of her. 2)Thank you for teaching us so well.
3．几组易混淆的介词
A． ?在...之后? in + 一段时间（用于一般将来时）
after + 一段时间（用于一般过去时） after + 一点时间（常用于一般将
来时）
如：The baby stopped crying after half an hour.
The baby will stop crying in half an hour. They will visit their
teacher after Friday.
B． for +一段时间 since +过去的一点时间
这两者均用于现在完成时，具体在时态部分，我会继续向同学们讲解。
C． be made of "用……制成" be made in ?由某地制造?be made by somebody
?由某人制成?
D． in, on, at表时间 in ?在某月(季节、年)等? eg:in 1996, in January, in summer
固定词组：in the morning, in a week,in a minute,in time, in the end on "用于指具体的某一天或专指某一天上午、下午或晚上等"
eg:on Christmas Day, on the night of February 16
at ?用于具体时刻前和某些固定词组中?
固定词组：at seven, at the moment, at night, at last, at first, at noon, at times, at once, at this time of the year, at the beginning of, at the end of this month, at the same time 注意：在表时间里，下列情况下一般不用介词。词组里有：next, last, this, that, tomorrow, yesterday, one, every, all 以及the day before yesterday和the day after tomorrow 前不用介词 。 如:不能说 in tomorrow ,只能说 tomorrow 在明天
E. except +宾格/doing something "除…之外? （不包括本身）
Everyone is at school today except Lin Tao. (同义句转换) =Only Lin Tao isn't at school today.
F． ?用? 通过交通工具 by plane
用语言 in English 通过媒介 on /over the telephone, on /over the radio, on TV
用工具手段 with a pen, with one's hands
G． between ?在~和~（两者）之间?
between...and..., between the two... among 在...之间(三者或三者以上)
eg.Sue spent over two hours ___ her homework yesterday evening. A.on
B.with C.at D.over
二、 连词
1．并列连词 both…and 既~又~谓语用复数动词
neither…nor 既不~也不~含否定意义，（就近原则）谓语动词由靠近它的那个主语来决定单复数。 either…or… ?或者 …或者…??不是…就是…? and?和? 连接两个并列成分,连接谓语时,两个动词时态应一致。 but ?但是? 表转折，不能与 though 同时出现在句中。
or ?或者?在否定句中，并列句中的列举常用 or，而不用 and。 Eg: I have brothers and sisters.(否) I don't have brothers or sisters.= I have no brothers and no sisters.
2．引导宾语从句的连词
陈述句：that 可省略 一般疑问句：if /whether ?是否? 特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词
3．引导原因状从的有：because (不能与so同时出现在句中)
4．引导时间状语从句的连词：
A. when（当…时候），as soon as…（一…就），not…until（直到…才），after（在…之后），引导的主从复合句，主句为一般将来时，从句则用一般现在时来代替一般将来时。 Eg: I won't leave until he comes back.
B. since（自从…以来）引导的主从复合句，主句为现在完成时，从句用一般过去时。 Eg：We haven't met each other since she left here last year.
C. while（当…时候，一边…一边…）它引导的时间状语从句常用进行时态。
Eg: My father came in while I was doing my homework.
5．引导条件状语从句的连词： if ?如果?，引导条件状从，主句用一般将来时，从句则用一般现在时。请区别于if?是否?相当于 whether，引导宾语从句，时态根据语境确定
eg:1)I don't know if it ＿＿＿＿ (rain) tomorrow.
2)If it ______ (rain) tomorrow, I _____________ (not climb) the hills.
3)Joan and Mary haven't seen each other_____they left school five years ago.
A.as B.before C.after D.since
三、 构词法
构词有法记无定法
一、利用构词法记忆：
1．合成法：note＋book→notebook，school＋yard→schoolyard，book＋mark→bookmark
2．派生法（即在词根上加前、后缀记忆）：
en－（使……有）＋courage→encourage；inter－（one with another；face to face）＋view→interview；foreign＋er（人）→foreigner，play＋er（执行动作的人）→player，sharpen＋er（执行动作的物）→sharpener；library＋（y→i）an（人）→librarian；miss（v．）＋ing→missing（adj．），probable（adj．）＋（l）y→probably（adv．），sad（adj．）＋ly→sadly（adv．）；compose（v．）＋（e→i）tion→composition（n．），inform（v．）＋（a）tion→information（n．）
3．转化法： know（v．）→knowledge（n．）
二、意义关联帮你记忆：
dictionary—words，umbrella—rain，library—book—shelf，kitchen—cook
三、英英解释，温故知新：
abroad—in or to another country，overseas；interview—meeting with sb． 说说记忆单词的方法
词是构成句子的重要元素，词汇量的多少在英语学习中占有重要地位。今天我们讲讲怎样记忆单词。
一、把单词放入句子中，在一定的语言环境中记忆单词。如果一旦忘记词义，就回忆它所在的句子。很多成绩较好的同学都有一个体会，抓住对句子的理解和背诵这样一个关键，记忆单词一般来说是毫不费力的。
二、将单词按归类的方法进行记忆。把同义词归成一类，如 learn－－study，between－－among；反义词归成一类，如 left－－right，high－－low，strong－－weak；或根据含义和用途把同一类型的词归成一类，如交通工具类：car，bus，ship，plane，truck，…学科类：maths，science，art，geography，…频度副词类：always，usually，often，sometimes，never，…等等。这样当遇到其中一个词时，头脑中出现的就是一组词，这样记忆单词的效率就会大大提高。同时，还可以掌握词与词之间的区别和各自特殊的用法，将平时极易混淆的单词清楚地区别开来。
三、利用构词法记忆单词。比如 happy（幸福的），加前缀?un?成为 unhappy（不幸福的），改?y?为?i?加后缀?ness?则变成了名词：happiness（幸福）；
?pea（豌豆）?与?nut（坚果）?可合成为?peanut（花生）?；when（何时）＋ever（在任何时候）＝whenever（无论什么时候）等等。
四、根据记忆与遗忘的规律来记忆单词，即应及时在第二天、第三天甚至以后再读第一天记忆的单词，定期作阶级性的复习，同遗忘作斗争。要记忆单词就不能怕重复，重复也是记忆的一种好方法。
五、初中阶段还有一个很实用的记忆单词的好方法就是根据音标即单词读音来记单词。只要你首先根据音标把一个单词读准、读对，那么就可根据其读音基本拼写出该单词。首先这要掌握一定的拼读规则。比如?dirty?，根据音标我们就能拼写出d-ir－t－y（在非重读音节中发［i］）。这种方法对于记忆字母较多的单词尤其有效，如?contribution?，根据音标我们可把它分成四部分来记忆：con－tri－bu－tion，这样就能较快地记住单词。
以系统的方式来学习记忆知识能起到事半功倍的效果。因此背单词时我们一定要留心观察，寻找词与词之间的关系，这样将有助于我们记忆单词。总之，只要我们掌握一些科学的方法，并用心去记忆，就一定能记住英语单词。
合成形容词
英语中有许多种形式的合成形容词，仅在初中阶段需要学习使用的就达九种。现分述如下：
1．数词＋单数名词。
如：20－minute 20分钟的 It＇s 20－minute walk．步行20分钟的路程。 second－class 二等的 That＇s the second－class room． 那是个二等房间。 500－word 五百字的
This is a 500－word composition． 这是一篇五百字的文章。
2．数词＋单数名词＋形容词。
如：8－year－old 八岁的 Mr Green has an 8－year－old child． 格林先生有个八岁的孩子。
3．数词＋名词的ed形式。如：three－legged 三条腿的 Tom bought a three－legged table yesterday． 昨天汤姆买了一张三条腿的桌子。
4．形容词＋名词。如：
round－trip来回的；往返的 Do you need a round－trip ticket﹖ 你想要一张往返的车票吗？
part－time 非全部工作时间的；兼职的He found a part－time job． 他找到了一份额外的工作。
5．形容词＋名词的ed形式。
如：kind－hearted 好心的 Father Christmas is very kind－hearted． 圣诞老人的心肠非常好。
6．名词＋过去分词。如：man－made人造的
China has sent up many man－made satellites． 中国已发射了许多人造卫星。
7．名词＋名词的ed形式。如：glass－topped带有玻璃罩的
I want to own a glass－topped table． 我想要一张带有玻璃罩的桌子。
8．副词＋过去分词。如：so－called所谓的
I don＇t like those so－called singers． 我不喜欢那些所谓的歌星。
9．副词＋副词。
如：so－so马马虎虎；不好不坏的 My English is just so－so． 我的英语很一般。．
Eg:To an American,a Chinese is a ______. (foreign) 前缀 例词 派生词 un-?不? happy unhappy like unlike usual unusual friendly unfriendly im-?不? possible impossible 后缀 例词 派生词 -er?人? teach/play/clean teacher/player/cleaner drive driver（以e结尾，-r） run runner（重读闭音节，双写-er)
win winner travel traveller -or?人? invent inventor visit visitor
-ly（副词后缀）
bad badly quick quickly careful carefully happy happily
deep deeply lucky luckily usual usually noisy noisily
slow slowly angry angrily strong strongly quiet quietly 特例： true - truly terrible - terribly possible - possibly -ful（形容词后缀） care careful help helpful use useful forget forgetful
-y （形容词后缀）
rain rainy luck lucky cloud cloudy noise noisy（以e结尾，去e，加-y）
snow snowy sun sunny （双写，加-y） wind windy
-ion（名词后缀） invent invention operate operation -ness（名词后缀） busy business good goodness
一些特例：
动词 形容词 动词 现在分词转化为名词
sleep asleep boat boating die dead build building
enjoy enjoyable begin beginning cross crossing
名词 形容词 meet meeting friend friendly turn turning
south southern shop shopping wool woolen
danger dangerous 动词 过去分词转为形容词 difference different fry
fried worry worried
动词 名词 break broken know knowledge lose lost
fly flight please pleased please pleasure colour coloured 名词 名词 动词 现在分词、过去分词转为形容词
farm farmer 农夫 follow following interest interested?感兴趣的? 只作表语，仅用于be interested in develop interesting ?有趣的? 可作表语和定语 developed ?发达的? developing ?发展中的? 练习题 1、Lucy can write a letter___Japanese though she has learned it only a few months.
A. from B. to C. in D. with
2、They will have an English test___two days. A. for B. at C. in
D. after
3、Wu Dong was born___the evening of April 2,1975. A. at B. in C. on
D. to
4、I haven 't heard _______ her _____ she left home.
A. from, since B. from, after C. of, when D. of , as
5、Tom didn't know___Jack would leave for Beijing tomorrow.
A. how B. weather C. whether D. what
6、His parents were _________ (happy) because he had failed the exam again.
7、Mrs. Green liked to stay _____ (safe) at the same place.
8、The_______ (visit) from France are going to visit our school this afternoon.
思考题 1、The farmer was___tired___he couldn't fall asleep.
A. very…to B. too…to C. so…that D.neither…nor
2、Work hard, ___you won't catch up with the others. A. but B. and
C. if D. or
3、The game is very ___ and she's ___ in it. A. interesting, interesting
B. interested, interested
C. interested, interesting D. interesting, interested
重要的短语、句型和惯用法（一）
1. get on/off(the bus) 上/下车 get up 起床 get ready for 为...作准备
get oneself dressed 自己穿衣服 get well (better) 身体好 get in 进入，收集
get sb.sth.=get sth.for sb. 为某人买某物
get on well with sb/sth. 与某人相处很好，...进展顺利
2. have an accident 出事故 have a good time =enjoy oneself 玩得很高兴
have a cold wet day 天气又冷又湿 have a cough 咳嗽 have a drink(of)... 喝一杯...
have a talk 听报告 have lunch 吃午饭 have...for lunch 午饭吃...
have a meeting 开会have no idea 不知道 have a rest 休息一下
3. make a mistake 犯错误 mistake A for B 把A错认为B
take sth. by mistake 错拿某物
4. make friends with 与...交朋友
make faces 做鬼脸make a fire 生火 make an excuse 找籍口
make a...sound 发...音 make tea 沏茶 make room for... 为...找出空间 make it 如期赴约 make a team 组成一个队
eg.Let's make it half past one. 注意：时间前不用介词at
5. turn sth. on/off 打开/关掉... turn sth. up/down 把...音量开大/小 注意：当sth 是代词时，常放中间
6. try sth. on 试穿（衣、鞋、帽） 注意：当 sth 为it或them, 常放中间try out 试验、尝试
try one's best to do sth. 尽力干某事=do one's best to do sth.
7. send sb. away 开除、解雇某人 send for sb. 派人去请某人 send up 发射
8. hear from sb 收到...的来信 hear of 听说
9. hurry off 匆匆离去，赶快去 hurry up 赶快
10. get to +名词 get +副词(不用to) reach+名词/副词 arrive in/at +大
/小地点 （后接副词，不用at/in）
eg. get to Shanghai、reach Shanghai 、arrive in Shanghai到达上海 eg. reach home、get home、arrive home 到家
11. teach sb. English 教某人英语 teach oneself=learn sth.by oneself 自学
12.到...末为止 by the end of +过去时间 （用于过去完成时）
by the end of +将来时间 （用于一般将来时）
at the end of+地点 在...尽头 in the end= at last 最后，终于
13. hundreds of 成百上千 thousands of 成千上万的 millions of 成百万的
14. be pleased to do sth 很高兴地干某事 be pleased with sth. 为某事而高兴
15. be used for 被用来 be used as 被当作 be used by 被...所使用
16. so far 到目前为止， 用于现在完成时
17. on a Tuesday morning 一个星期二的早上
on the morning of June 15th.1998 在19xx年6月15日早上
18. keep sb.doing sth. 让某人一直干某事 keep doing sth. 继续做某事 keep on doing sth. 持续不断地做某事
19. much too+形容词／副词原级 实在太...
too much+不可数名词 相当多的... eg. It's _______ expensive. I can't buy it.
There's ___________ rain this year.
20. thanks to...由于，多亏
thanks to one's help=because of one's help 由于某人的帮忙 thanks for one's help 谢谢某人的帮助
21. be far away from＋a place/sb 远离某地
22. wear out 穿坏、穿旧、用尽 常用于被动语态。其P.P为worn
sell out 售完 卖完
23. two-month holiday=two months' holiday 二个月的假期
24. fall asleep 入睡（进入状态） get to sleep 入睡（还没睡着）
25. stop sb.from doing sth. 阻止某人干某事 eg. She stopped the child from listening. stop doing sth. 停止干某事，不再干某事 stop to do sth. 停止下来干另一件事。
26. hardly any +n. 几乎没有...
27. quite a/an+形容词＋名词 一个相当...eg. Two months is quite a long time.
a very ＋形容词+名词eg. English is a very useful language.
28. be afraid of+名词 害怕... be afraid to+动词 担心、害怕... be afraid that+从句 恐怕...
29. so+形容词 so strong so beautiful such+形容词+名词(复数或不可数)
such beautiful pictures such nice smell such + a/an+形容词+名词（单数）
such an interesting story
30. feel like doing 想干某事
31. be made/grown/produced
三个词的被动语态都可解释为?生产?
归类: 机器一类→make(制造)
盐.糖.丝绸→produce (经机器加工生产) 农作物、水果→grow (人工种出来
的)
32. finish doing sth. 做完某事 be busy doing sth. 忙于干某事
go on doing sth. 继续干某事 be always doing 老是干某事
33. hope to do sth. 希望干某事 ...hope that...希望某人干某事,不可用hope
sb.to do sth.
34. in surprise 惊奇地（作状语） be surprised at sb. 对某人的举动感
到诧异
be surprised to do sth. 对做某事感到惊讶
35. no space(room) to stand in 没有站的地方、空间
36. be angry with sb. 生某人的气 agree with sb. 同意某人的观点 with
one's help 在某人的帮助下
选择题：
1.They arrived ___ London___ a cold winter night.
A.at, in B.in, on C.at, on D.in, at
2.It's rather cold today.You'd better ___ more clothes before you go out.
A.put on B.wear C.to put on D.to wear
3.You must be very tired. Why not ___ a rest?
A.stop taking B.stop to take C.to stop taking D.to stop to take
4.___, I've caught up with my classmates in my English studies.
A.Under his help B.With his help C.Under the help of him D.With the
help of him
5.Mother told me ____ in the sun. A.not read B.don't read C.read
not D.not to read
6.Watching TV ___ is bad for your eyes. A.much too B.many too C.too
much D.too many
7.Those foreign visitors ___ our city the day before yesterday.
A.arrived B.reached C.reached to D.got in
8.She asked me to help her ___ her Chinese. A.at B.with C.for D.on
9.Look ___ the words in the dictionary when you don't know ___ they mean.
A.up, what B.up, that C.for, that D.for, what
10.One after another, three of them ___.
A.fell asleep B.got to asleep C.went to asleep D.were sleeping
完成句子：
1.你想不想喝杯桔子汁？ Do you ______ ______drinking a glass of orange?
2.小杨毕业离校以来，我们从未收到他的来信。
We have never ______ ______ Xiao Yang since he _______ school for the
last time.
3.人们兴建绿色长城是为了阻止风将土刮走。
People started to build the Great Green Wall ___ ___ it could stop the
wind from ___ the earth away.
4.魏华把你错当成他的兄弟，是吗？
Wei Hua ________ you ______ his brother,didn't she? 思考题：
1.人造卫星能用来向国外发送电视和广播节目
Man-made satellites can be ___ for ___ TV and radio programmes to foreign
countries.
2.多亏有了绿色长城，现在他们种的棉花比以前多得多了。
____ to the Great Green Wall, they can grow a lot ___ cotton than before.
3.学生们相互交朋友，通常相处得很好。
The students make friends ___ one another and usually ___ ___ well.
4.店主说你的尺寸的羊毛衫已售完了。
The shopkeeper said the woolen sweaters ___ your size were ____. 重要的短语、句型和惯用法（二）
1.There be 结构
a.这是英语中常见的一种结构，表示?某地有某物?其含义为?存在有?。
eg.There are twenty girls in our class.have也解释为?有?但是与there be
有区别，它的含义是?所有，属有?，其主语为某人。eg.I have a nice watch. b.There be 结构中的be动词要和后面所跟名词保持一致。
c.There is a river near our school.否：There is not a river near our
school.
问：Is there a river near our school.回答：Yes, there is. No, there isn't.
划⑴How many rivers are there near our school? ⑵What's near our school? d.there be 结构的一般将来时，同学们较难掌握，其正确形式为：there is going
to be
e.反意疑问句的构成：There is no water in the glass, is there?
⒈There is going to _____ a football match this afternoon. A.have
B.watch C.be D.play
⒉They were sure that they were going to ____ a rest. A.be B.have
C.be on D.on
2.so,neither引导的倒装句,为了避免和前一句话的内容重复，英语中习惯用
so,neither引导的倒装句。
a.So+be(助动词，情态动词)+主语。表示某人也是如此。
eg.Mike has bought some foreign stamps. So has Bob.=Bob has bought
some,too.
b.Neither+be(助动词，情态动词)＋主语，表示某人也不。
eg.Mother has never been to Japan. Neither has Father.=Father has
never been to Japan, either.
c.So＋主语＋be(助动词，情态动词)。表示果真如此(赞同), 请同学们与a.区
别。
eg.A:Mike is right in the classroom. B:So he is.=He is really in the
class room.
3.It's+时间+since动词过去式。自从...起已有...时间了。
⑴It's two weeks since we met last.(自从我们上次见面已有两个星期了)
⑵How long is it since we left Beijing?(自从我们离开北京已有多久了
4.祈使句+and (那么)...eg.Go straight on and you'll see a school.=If you go straight on, you'll see a school. 5.祈使句+or...否则...eg.Work hard, or you will fall behind the other students. =If you don't work hard, you'll fall behind the other
6. The+比较级...，the+比较级... 越...越...
eg.⑴The more, the better. 越多越好。
⑵The harder you work on it, the better you'll be at it.(你越用功，你就越好。)
7.How do you like the film? =What do you think of the film? (你认为这部电影怎样？)
8.What...do with...?怎样对付...?怎样处理...?
虽然中文为怎样，我们绝不可照字面翻译为how.
eg.A:What have you done with the library book? B:I've just returned it to the library.
9.I don't know what to do.我不知道该怎么办？ I don't know how to do. ×
10.What...be like?...是什么样的？
eg.⑴What's the weather like? 天气如何？⑵What's your school like? 你们学校是什么样的？
11.What...for?为何目的？为什么？eg.What do you want a science lab for?=Why do you want a science lab?
12.one of +最高级＋复数 最...之一eg.Miss Zhao is one of the most popular teachers.
13.find it +形容词+to do eg.I find it useful to learn English well. (我发觉学好英语是很有用的)
find +宾语 +名词eg.I find him a good boy. (我发现他是个好男孩.) find +宾语 +形容词
eg.I find the door open/closed. (我发现门开/关着) I find our bags filled with/full of presents. (我发现我们的包装满了礼物)
14.I don't think+肯定句 我想...不 eg.I don't think I'll take it. (我想我不买它了)
请注意:中文意思否定在从句中,但是英语的表达否定在主句中。
15.prefer A to B=like A better than B 更喜欢A不怎么喜欢B.
eg. I prefer fish to chicken.= I like fish better than chicken
16.had better do sth.最好干某事.否定:had better not do sth.
特别注意:had better后面跟be动词词组,不可漏掉be.eg.You'd better catch a train.
You'd better not talk in class.You'd better not be late for the class.
17.It is good (nice)of+宾格+to do sth.
eg.It is very good of you to teach me English. (你教我英语真是太好了)
18.It takes sb. some time to do sth.(干某事化费某人多少时间)
=sb.spend some time on sth. (in) doing sth.eg.It took me half an hour to do the work.
=I spent half anhourin doing the work.
19.sb.pay 钱 for 物 某物化费了某人多少钱=sb.spend 钱 on 物 =物 cost sb.钱 , pay的过去式为paid 而不是payed. eg.I paid thirty yuan for the coat. =I spent thirty yuan on the coat.
=The coat cost me thirty yuan. 20.have been to 某人曾去过某地,现在人
不在那儿
sb.have been in +地点 某人呆在某地(一段时间) have gone to 某人已
去某地,人不在这儿
21.⑴ too…形容词(副词)+to…"太…而不能" "太…以致于不"
eg.⒈The basket is too heavy for me to carry. 这篮子太重我拿不动。 ⒉
This colour TV is too expensive for us to buy. 这台彩电对我们来说太贵
了，买不起。
⑵so...that 如此...以致于...上面的too...to结构的句子，可以换成
so...that 引导的句子转换。⒈The basket is so heavy that I can't carry it.
⒉This colour TV is so expensive that we can't afford it.
22.What's the population of ...? ...人口有多少？ 不说How much population in...?形容人口数量的大用large eg.The population of China is ten times as large as that of the USA
23.I've come to return your pan. (我跑来是还你锅的) →Why have you come? 而不用What
24.not...until (连词)方才，才
eg.He says that he won't be free until tomorrow.他说他需到明天方才有空。 肯定句＋until 到
eg.You'd better wait until tomorrow. (你最好等到明天)
25.neither...nor... 既不...也不... either...or... 或者...或
者...
eg.Neither Tom nor his brothers know how to spell the word "hundred".
Either you or she is right. (谓语动词就近原则)
both...and... 两者都... eg.Both Jim and I are in Grade One (主语看作
复数)
练习题：
1.-Where is Mary? -Oh, she _____ the librory.
A.has gone to B.went to C.has been to D.had gone to
2.He knew little about the film ____ he saw it yesterday evening.
A.if B.since C.until D.because
3.I____ change his mind. Don't worry, He'll surely come to get it.
A.think he won't B.think he will C.don't think he won't D.don't think he will
4.- _____do you_____ the TV play? - Not bad, I think.
A.How;think of B.What;like C.How;like D.What;think
5. I _____ have a good time _____ the party.
A.hope you will;at B.like you; on C.hope you to ;in D.want you that; from
完成句子：
1.中国有多少人口，中国的人口大约是世界人口的四分之一。 _____ the population of China?
It's about _____ ______ of the world's population.
2.门铃一直响着，直到门被林涛打开才停。
The doorbell ______ _____until the door was opened by Lin Tao.
3.午饭后他休息了一会儿，我也休息了一会儿。
He had a short rest after lunch, and ______ ______ I.
4.史密斯夫妇离开他们的家乡已有十多年时间了。
______ more than ten years ____ Mr and Mrs Smith left their home town.
5.公共汽车里挤得几乎连站的地方都没有.
The bus was_____ crowded that there was hardly ______ standing room in it.
思考题：
1、做饭花了她半个小时。 It ___ ____ half an hour ___ ___ some cooking. =I ______ half an hour _______ some cooking.
2、你真好，经常在数学上帮助我。 It’s really nice _____ you to ____ me _____ my ______.
3、Lily跑得不快，赢不了比赛。
Lily ______ run quickly _____ ______ _____ the race.=Lily ____ ____ ___ ___ ____the race.
4、在美术课上做一张教师节卡片怎样？
_____ ____ _____ a Teachers’ Day card ____ the art lesson?
5、足球是我校最受欢迎的运动项目之一。
Football is ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ games in our school.
Have 的两种特殊句型
have是英语中最活跃的动词之一，它与不同的词搭配表示不同的意思。如：have a meeting（开会），have a rest（休息），have a class（上课）等。你可知道have构成的两种特殊句型吗？不看不知道，一看就明了。
1．have＋宾语＋省略to的动词不定式
该句型中作主语的?人或物?让作宾语的?人或物?去做某事。此时的宾语与省略to的不定式（宾语补足语）之间有逻辑上的主谓关系。如：I would have you buy a new bike． 我想让你买辆新自行车。We can＇t have the car stop． 我们无法让汽车停下来。
2．have＋宾语＋过去分词
该句型中作主语的?人或物?让作宾语的?人或物?被……。此时的宾语与过去分词（宾语补足语）之间有逻辑上的动宾关系。如： I＇ll have my hair cut tomorrow．
我明天要理发。They have just had their car repaired．他们刚找人把车修理了一下。
注意：大多数情况下，这两种句型之间可以互换。如：
1）He had me wash the table cloth．→He had the table cloth washed．
2) The man had the bike mended．→ The man had someone mend the bike． 练习：根据汉语意思，完成英语句子，每空一词。
1．你应该找人建一座房子。
You should have someone＿＿＿＿＿a house． You should have a house＿＿＿＿＿．
2．现在我们请下一位演讲者到前面来。 Now we＇ll have the next speaker＿＿＿＿＿to the front．
3．你必须让人把这些书送到教室去。
You must have these books＿＿＿＿＿ to the classroom
情景交际英语（一）
1.问候： ⑴A:Good morning/afternoon/evening. Hello/Hi. How do you do ?
Nice to meet you. B:回答相同 ⑵A:How are you? B:Fine, thank you.And you? Very well,thank you.
2.介绍： ⑴This is Mr/Mrs/Miss...⑵ I'd like you to meet my parents.⑶ My name is....I'm a student.
3.告别 A:Goodbye.See you later/tomorrow. Good night.
B:回答相同4.感谢和应答 表示感谢 通常回答
Thank you very much. Not at all. Thanks a lot. That's OK. Many thanks. That's all right.
Thanks for helping me. You're welcome.
5.祝愿、祝贺和应答
⑴A:Good luck! Best wishes to you. Have a nice/good time/journey. Congratulations! B:Thank you.
⑵A:Happy New Year! Merry Christmas! B:The same to you.
⑶A:Happy birthday to you. B:Thank you.
6.道歉和应答 A:I'm sorry.I'm sorry to trouble you. B:It doesn't matter.
It's not important. That's nothing.
7.遗憾和同情 What a pity!I'm sorry to hear that.
8.邀请和应答 A:Would you like to … ? B:Yes, I'd love to.
9.提供帮助和应答
A:Can I help you?=What can I do for you?Here, take this/my bike.
Let me do it for you.B:Thanks for your help. Yes, please. No, thanks. That's very kind of you.
10.请求允许 ⑴A:May I...? Can I/Could I...? B:Yes/Certainly/Of course. Yes, do please. OK/All right. ⑵A:Do you mind if I open the window? B:No, not at all. 或Never mind.
11.表示同意和不同意
(1):Certainly/Sure/Of course.Yes, please. Yes, I think so. All right/OK. That's a good idea. I agree with you.
(2):No, I don't think so. I'm afraid not. I really can't agree with you.
12.表示肯定和不肯定 1: I'm sure. I'm sure that... 2: I'm not sure. I'm not sure whether/if... Maybe.
13.喜欢和厌恶 1: I like /love...(very much) I like /love to... 2: I don't like to... I hate to ...
14. 问时间、日期的应答 A:What day is it?
B:It's Monday.A:What's the date?B:It's Jan. 10th.
A:What's the time,please? B:It's five o'clock/half past five... It's time
to ...
15.请求 (1): Can/could you...for me? Will/would you please do sth.?
May I have...?
(2): Please give/pass me... Please wait (here/a moment). Please
wait for your turn. Please stand in line.
(3): No smoking, please. No noise, please.
16.劝告和建议 1:You'd better... You should... You need to...
2:Shall we do sth. ? Let's do sth. . What/How about doing sth. ? 回
答: OK. Good idea.
17.禁止和警告 1:You mustn't play on the road. If you ... you'll ...
2:Take care.=Be careful.
18.表示感情 A:喜悦 Great!That's nice.
I'm glad/pleased/happy to...B:焦虑 What's wrong? What's the matter
with you?I'm/He's/She's worried. Oh, what shall I do? C:惊奇
Really?Oh, dear!Is that so?
19.约会 A:Are you free this afternoon? What/How about tomorrow morning?
Shall we meet at 4:30 at the school gate?
B:Yes, that's all right. Yes, I'll be free then. All right.See you
then.
20.语言困难 Pardon?Please say that more slowly again.
What do you mean by...?I'm sorry I know only a little English.
21.表示称赞： A:Oh, how nice! Your dress is beautiful.B:It's nice of you
to say so. 或Thank you.
22.常见的标志和说明
BUSINESS HOURS NO PHOTOS OFFICE HOURS THIS SIDE UP OPEN
CLOSED PULL PUSH EXIT ENTRANCE 营业时间 禁止拍照 办公时间
这边向上 开 关
1.-Would you like to go to the zoo with us? ____.
A.Yes, please. B.That's true. C.Yes, I'd love to. D.Quite well.
2.-I've done quite well in the exam this term. -___ __.
A.I don't know. B.Congratulations. C.So do I. D.Go on, please.
3.If your friend tells you that he is ill, you may say"_ __"
A.Excuse me. B.I'm sorry to hear that. C.It doesn't matter.
D.I don't think so.
4.-Have a good journey, Alice. A.All right B.Thanks a lot.
C.Very good D.Much better
5.The sign"THIS SIDE UP" is often seen ____.
A.on a box B.in the street C.in a cinema D.in a park
思考题：
1.-Thank you for your help. -__ ___
A.All right. B.That's all right. C.That's right. D.It's very kind
of you.
2.-Do you mind if I close the window? -____ __
A.No, I mind. B.Yes, I don't mind. C. No, not at all. D.Yes, I'm afraid not.
3.-Help yourself to some apples.-__ A.I don't like it. B.Sorry, I can't help it.
C.Never mind. D.Thank you very much.
4.-Tom will take care of our cat while we're away. -____
A．Fine, thank you. B.I'll do it myself. C.That's very kind of him.
D.It doesn't matter.
5.-You speak English quite well. -__ __
A.I don't think so. B.You don't say so. C.No, I don't speak well.
D.Thank you.
动词的时态与语态的综合运用
确定正确的时态
1.根据时间状语确定时态.时间状语与时态有着密切的关系.
a. I ________ (write) now. b. I ______(lose) my pen yesterday.
c. We ___________ (study) English for two years.
2.根据上下文来确定时态
有些句子没有明显的时间状语,又不能用时态呼应规则来对照,这时就可以根据
上下文内容来判断时间关系,确定正确时态. A.Where are the twins? B.They ______ (go) to visit Uncle Wang.
3.根据主从句的关系来确定时态. 4.根据语言习惯来确定时态
*1.come,go,leave 等趋向性动词的进行时可用来表示即将发生的动作.
*2.永恒的真理和客观存在的状态用一般现在时.
*3.祈使句中,或在情态动词,助动词后,谓语动词用原形
Don't _____ (read)in the sun , will you? You'd better _____ (stay)at home since it's raining outside.
注意所填动词的语态
Today both basketball and volleyball _________(play) in many countries. 确定动词的形式
1. be busy,what about等后用动词的-ing 形式. 2.在介词后一般应用动词
的-ing 形式.
3.在 keep,enjoy,finish,mind 等动词后采用动词的--ing 形式.
4.在动词 decide,hope,wish,hate 等动词后应用动词不定式作宾语,而在ask, tell,want,teach 之后则用动词不定式的复合结构,即 ?ask sb. to do sth.?的形式
5.在see,hear,watch,make,let等后面作宾语补足语的动词不定式应省略动词
不定式符号? to?, 但在被动句中, 应添上"to".
6.在 It‘s time(for sb.)to do sth. It's kind/nice/good of sb. to do sth. It takes sb. some time to do sth. 的句型中, 动词不定式短语作句子真正的
主语.
7.疑问代词/副词 (why 除外) + to do sth. 结构,可在句中作主语, 表语和宾
语.
练习题：
1.The Great Green Wall will stop the wind from ________(blow) the earth
away.
2.Mr Smith kept on _____ (ask) the players to remember-----TEAMWORK
3.Alice didn't hear what the teacher said just now,so she doesn't know
how ____ (do) the problem.
4.The policeman asked the old granny to put down her heavy box and let
him ______ (carry) it for her.
5.用help,happen,listen,have,ask,be,plant,miss,leave,look的适当形式
填空:
(1).WangHai is a good comrade.He always does his best ________others.
(2).Dig the hole big enough,or the trees can’t ___________well .
(3).It's time for class.Let's stop _______to the teacher.
(4).Her face turned red when she _______ to sing a song for all of us.
(5).She is older than Mary but ________much younger.
(6).--I can't find my keys.--Maybe you ___________ them at home.
(7).We waited in the next room while they ____________a meeting.
(8).Hurry up.You __________the train if you don't.
思考题：
用 send,show,turn,cost,write,fly,get,stop,see,do,hear,go 的适当形式填
空
1.____ you ___ each other since you left school ten years ago?
2.What ___they ___at 8:00 yesterday evening.
3.The Smiths are getting ready ___to Australia for their holdiay.
4.The beautiful jacket___too much , doesn't it?
5.Lucy and Lily were playing cards when they ___ a loud knock at the
door.
6.The radio says the rain ___later on.
7.The boy ___to hospital as soon as the traffic accident happened.
8.Today films___in English everywhere in the world.
9.It's summer now.The days___longer and the nights shorter.
10.Mother ___ to Shanghai and she'll be back in a week or so. 动词的时态（上）
A:一般现在时棗通常表示目前阶段经常发生的动作或存在的状态。
结构 ：1）be动词的第一人称单数为，第三人称单数为，其他人称为。
有一顺口溜体现了它的用法： 我是am你是are ，is跟着他她它, 复数都用are 肯定式:主语+ am /is/are +其他 否定式:主语+ am/is/are +not + 其他
疑问式:Am /Is /Are + 主语+ 其他?简略回答: (肯) Yes,主语 + am/ is /are
(否) No,主语 + am /is/are not缩写形式: I'm == I am That's ==That is
We're ==We are What's== What is You're == You are Who's == Who is
They're ==They are Where's ==Where is He's ==He is isn't==is not
She's ==She is aren't==are not It's == It is
2）行为动词除主语是第三人称单数外，都用动词原形，主语是第三人称单数时，
在动词 词尾加-s或-es 肯定式:主语+动词原形/动词的第三人称单数 ， 否
定式:主语+助动词 don't/doesn't +动词原形+其他 疑问式:Do/Does+
主语+动词原形+其他 简略回答:(肯)Yes,主语+do/does (否)No,主语+do/does not 缩写形式: don't == do not doesn't ==does not
注意：have的第三人称单数为has
用法： 1.表示事实,现状,性质或经常的,习惯的动作,常与often, usually, always, sometimes, today,every day,once a week, every five minutes, on Sundays等时间状语连用, eg. He has a brother. 2.表示普遍真理. eg. The earth goes round the sun.
3.表示在现在时间里所发生的一个动作 . eg. Here comes the train.
4.在时间和条件状语从句中代表一般将来时 . eg.I'll go with you if you are free tomorrow.
B:一般过去时棗表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态，一般过去时通常由动词的过去式表示。
结构： 1.动词的第一、三有称单数用,其他人称用,其肯定式,否定式,疑问式和简略回答形式与一般现在时相似。 2.行为动词的过去式分为规则和不规则两种, 规则动词的过去式是在动词后加或,不规则动词参照不规则动词表,需要专门记忆。
肯定式:主语+动词的过去式 + 其他 eg. I got up at six this morning. 否定式:主语 + did not + 动词原形 + 其他 eg.John didn't live here last year. 疑问式:Did + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他 eg.Did you see him a moment ago?
简略回答.(肯)Yes, 主语 +did (否)No , 主语 + didn't.
用法 ：1.主要用于过去某个时间发生的动作或状态. eg.My father was at work yesterday.
2.表示过去经常或反复发生的动作,常与often,always 等表示频度的时间状语连用.
eg.He always went to work by bus last summer.
3.和when等连词引导的状语从句连用. eg.When she reached home, she had a short rest.
4.常与表示过去的时间状语, 如… ago, yesterday, last week, in the old days, when I was five years old, in 1995 等连用. eg.They began the work two months ago.
Were you born in 1981? Yes, I was.
C:一般将来时棗表示将来发生的动作或存在的状态
结构： 助动词shall/will + 动词原形（当主语第一人称时，一般用shall，当主语为第三人称时，用will，但主语为第一人称时，也用will 肯定式:主语+shall/will+动词原形+其他
否定式:主语+shall/will+not+动词原形+其他.
疑问式:Shall/Will+主语+动词原形+其他 简略回答:(肯)Yes,主语+shall/will .
(否)No,主语+shall/will+not … 缩写形式: 'll ==shall/will
shan't== shall not won't == will not
用法: 1.表示将要发生的动 作或情况,常用时间状语有: later (on), soon, in
a month, next time, from now on, tomorrow等. eg. I shall be eighteen years old next year.
Maybe China's population _______ (pass) 1,300,000,000 by the year 2005.
2.表示某种必然的趋势 eg. Fish will die without water.
解析： 1.在以第一人称为主语的问句中,常用 shall 表示提议和询问情况,在以第二人称作主语的问句中,用will 表示请求. eg. Where shall we have the meeting?
Will you please lend me your pen?
2.当主语是第一人称时,用will 表示意愿.决心.允诺.命令等.
eg. I will give you an English--Chinese dictionary for your birthday.
3.在时间或条件状语从句中,一般用一般现在时代替一般将来时. eg. Tom will write to me when he gets there. 4.be going to +动词原形也可表示将来时.
(1).表示主观意愿.打算等. eg. He's going to learn English next term.
(2).根据已有迹象,可能要发生的情况 eg. Look at the black clouds! ----It is going to rain.
D:现在进行时棗表示目前或目前阶段正在进行的动作。
结构： am/is/are + 动词的-ing形式
用法： 1.表示目前发生(进行)的动作(不指状态),常用时间状语有:now,at the moment 等,并常出现在祈使句的句子中,与 look, listen连用.
eg. Are you writing a letter to your father at the moment? Listen! She is singing in the next room.
2.表示目前阶段正在进行,而此刻不一定在进行的动作. eg. They are planting trees these days.
3.表示按计划或安排即将进行的动作,表示这种动作的动词有:come, go, leave, arrive, start, see等,并常与表示将来时间的状语连用. eg. They are leaving for Australia tomorrow afternoon.
注意: 某些表示感觉或状态的动词,如 love, like, prefer, hate, see, know等一般不用现在进行时. eg. Lucy prefers art to science.
练习题：
1.Mary and Joe go to the Shopping Center ___ . a.once a week b. in a week c. next week d. for a week 2.Be quiet! The baby ________ (sleep) in the next room.
3.Dick will pass the message on to your sister as soon as he ______ (meet) her in her office tomorrow.
4.The bell for the class rang while they ___________ (play) on the playground.
5.Lucy said it ___________ (rain) later on.
思考题:
1.The Chinese people ____(work) hard to make their country stronger and more beautiful.
2.He'll write to you as soon as he _____ (arrive ) in Hainan. 3.The students of Class One ___(have)a meeting from three to five yesterday afternnon.
4.The sky is black. It ____ (rain), I'm afraid. 5.If it ___(not
snow)tomorrow,we'll go skating
6.Mr and Mrs Green____(travel)to the south of China next week,aren't they?
7.I___(not see)the film with you because I've seen it already. 8.He told
us that he_____(stay)here till the next week. 9.I_____(lose)my pen
this morning. I haven't found it yet.
动词的时态（下）
G:现在完成时棗表示到目前为止已经完成，并对现在留下某种后果和影响的动
作。
结构：助动词have/has + 动词的过去分词
用法:
1.表示过去发生的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果,常与一些时间状语,
如:already, yet, ever, never, just, before, once,twice等连用,也可以和
包括现在在内的时间状语,如these days,today,this year,so far等连用.eg.I
have already posted the letter. (信已经不在我这儿了)
2.表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态,一直持续到现在,也许还将继续下去,可以
和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在的一段时间的状语连用,即for +时间
段,since+时间点/从句, in the last ten years等,谓语只可用延续性动词.
解析： 1.英语动词根据词义可分为两种,一种是延续性的,一种是终止性的,
终止性动词(也可称为非延续性动词,瞬间动词,或点动词),如
begin,start,die,buy,leave, come等,表示动作的发生与结束于一瞬间完成,不
能再延续,所以它的现在完成时不能和表示延续的时间状语连用,即不能与表示
一段时间的状语,for+时间段, since+时间点/从句连用,也不能用在how long
引导的特殊疑问句中.
eg. I've left Shanghai for three days.(×) I've been away from
Shanghai for three days.( √ ).
I left Shanghai three days ago. ( √ ) It is /has been three days since
I left Shanghai.( √ )
2.初中英语课本中常见终止性动词有:leave, go, come, arrive, begin, buy,
borrow, die, join, become等.终止性动词要表示持续时, 可用以下方法: ⑴.将时间状语改为时间段 + ago,句中谓语动词用一般过去时.
eg.我弟弟参军两年了. My brother joined the army two years ago. ⑵.若保留for+时间段,since+时间点/从句, 或用在 how long 句型中,则需将
终止性动词改为相应的状态动词或延续性动词
常见终止性动词与延续性动词(或状态动词)的对应关系如下
come/go/arrive/get/reach/move------be in/at open-----be open
die------be dead close----be closed become---be borrow---keep
begin/start-----be on put on----wear
leave-----be away (from) buy-----have fall asleep----be asleep
end/finish-----be over catch a cold-----have a cold
join the army----be in the army be a soldier join the Party----be in
the Party be a Party member
→My brother has been in the army for two years. →My brother has been
a soldier for two years.
3.现在完成时中been to,gone to和been in/at been to去过某地,表示某人的
一种经历,可以和once,twice,already,ever,never等连用. eg. She has
been to Shanghai twice. (表示目前人在这里)
gone to 去某地了,说话时某人已离开此地,在去某地的途中或已在某地,
eg. She has gone to Shanghai。 (表示现在她人不在这里)
been in/at 逗留在某地(已经一段时间).常和for ten days,since I came here
等连用.
eg. She has been in Shanghai since she moved there.
4.现在完成时和一般过去时的区别
现在完成时所表明的是过去发生的动作对现在的影响,强调的是现在的情况,不
可以和表示过去的时间状语yesterday,in 1991,three days ago last time,last
night等连用一般过去时表明的是过去发生的事实,和现在不发生关系.
5.现在完成时中的 for 与 since
for + 时间段 与延续性动词的现在完成时连用 since + 时间点/从句
I have kept the library book for a week.= I have kept the library book
since a week ago.
6. It is /has been +一段时间 + since 从句.自从某事发生已有一段时间了.
eg. It is /has been two years since my brother joined the army. 注
意:1.since 引导的从句中动词用过去时
2.when 引导 的特殊问句不与现在完成时连用.
3.have got,has got 虽然是现在完成时,但have got=have has got==has
练习题: 1.It's a long time since we ____ (meet) last,isn't it?
2.--I know you _______ (choose) a picture book among these. --Yes,Have
a look at it, please.
3.So far,spaceships without people _______ (reach) the moon and some other
partsof the universe.
4.My father____ home for nearly three weeks.
A.has gone away from B.has left C.has been away from D.went
away
5.Mr and Mrs Green have_____in China for a week. A.been B.got
C.arrived D.reached
6.--Where's Mary? --Oh,she _____the library.
A.has gone to B.went to C.has been to D.had gone to
H:过去完成时棗表示过去某一时间或动作之前已完成的动作
结构： 助动词had + 动词的过去分词
用法： 1.表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作,动作发生
的时间为?过去的过去?.表示过去某一时间可用by,before 等构成的短语,也
可用when,before等引导的从句或通过上下文表示. eg. By the end of last
term,we had learned a thousand English words.
He had finished his homework before his father came back last night.
2.表示过去某个时间之前发生的动作或状态, 一直延续到这一过去时刻,或还
将继续下去. eg. When I got to know him, he had worked there for twenty
years.(注意) 否定式 had not == hadn't
时态的呼应
1.主句中谓语动词如果是现在时或将来时,从句中的谓语动词可以用任何所需
要的时态, he wants to speak to the headmaster. He said that he won't
be free tomorrow. he came last night.
2.主句中的谓语动词如果是过去时态,从句中的谓语动词一般情况下要用过去
时态的某种形式. He said that he was working hard on his Chinese.
he had a very good journey home. he hadn't bought the present yet.
he would stop in Moscow on the way. 3.如果从句所述内容是客观真理,则谓
语动词总是用一般现在时,而不受主句中谓语动词时态的影响.
eg. Miss Gao told us that light travels much faster than sound.
4.时间或条件状语从句中,若主句是一般将来时或祈使句,从句要用一般现在
时代替将来时.
eg.Stop talking when the headteacher ______(walk)into the classroom.
Jim won't watch TV until he ___ (finish) his homework every time. 练习题： 1.They were so pleased to see each other that they almost ____
(forget) everything else around. 2. The girl put on her dress and then
_______ (go) to the mirror to look at herself.
思考题： 1.I____(leave)my ruler at home. Can I use yours?
2.Who's Jack London? I ___ never ____ (hear) of that man before.
3.I'm afraid I ___ (keep) you waiting for such a long time.
4.--Where ___ you___ (be)? --I'm looking for you all the time.
5.____they____ (know) each other when they were young?
6.The baby will cry if she ___ (not see) her mother
动词的语态
动词的语态---表示谓语与主语之间的关系的动词形式叫做语态，分为主动语态
和被动语态。
主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者,被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者
一、被动语态
结构:1.行为动词的被动语态: 助动词be + 及物动词的过去分词.
be有人称.时态.数的变化,其变化规则与be作为连系动词时完全一样.
一般现在时 am/is/are+及物动词的过去分词 一般过去时 was/were +及
物动词的过去分词
一般将来时 will +be +及物动词的过去分词 现在完成时 have/has+been+及
物动词的过去分词
2.情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词 + be +及物动词的过去分词
否定式:是在助动词 be 或情态动词后加not构成
疑问式:是把上述助动词或情态动词提到主语之前,句尾加问号构成.
用法: 1.不知道动作的执行者是谁,或没有必要或不想指出谁是动作的执行者.
eg. The window was broken yesterday. Is English taught in your school?
2.强调或突出动作的承受者,此时如想同时指出动作的执行者,可用?by +动作执
行者(宾格)来表示.
eg.The red dress was made by her mother. The letter must be written by
me.
注 意点： 1.只有及物动词能构成被动语态, 不及物动词不能构成被动语
态.
2.某些不及物动词与介词.副词搭配构成短语动词,带有宾语时,则有了动作的承受者,这时应把它们看作一个整体,变为被动语态,不能丢掉其中的介词,常用的有look after,take care of,cut down, laugh at,talk about,turn on等 eg.Catherine always takes care of the little girl.→The little girl is always taken care of by Carherine.
3.有些动词短语本身即是被动语态的形式, 不要再加by 短语,常用的有
be covered with be surprised at be interested in be worried about be made of/from be known to
4.某些动词形式是主动语态,但含有被动的意思. eg. This dictionary sells well.
This kind of car drives fast. The woolen sweater costs $ 88.
5.主动语态与被动语态的相互变化关系
主动句: 主语 + 谓语 + 宾语(动作执行者) (动作承受者)
被动句: 主语 +谓语动词的被动形式+ by + 动作执行者 (动作承受者)
1）主动句如何变为被动句
a.找到动作的承受者(常为主动句的宾语)作被动句的主语.b.找到谓语变为be + 过去分词的结构.
c.找到动作的执行者(常为主动句的主语)作 by 的宾语.若不必指出动作的执行者,可省去 by 短语. d.确定be动词的时态.数. 例如: She makes the beautiful kites.
The beautiful kites are made by her. (被动句)
2）被动句如何变为主动句. a.找到动作的执行者(常为被动句的宾语)作主动句的主语.
b.找到be+过去分词结构还原为及物动词原形.
c.找到动作的承受者(常为被动句的主语)作主动句的宾语.
d.确定及物动词的时态.数(注意)在以上转换中,代词作主语用主格, 代词作宾语用宾格.
6.主动语态中有些动词如:make,see,listen, watch,feel后常跟不带to的动词不定式作宾语补足语,变为被动语态要带上to
He made the boy work for him. →The boy was made to work for him.
7.主动语态中若有双宾语,变为被动语态时, 通常把指人的间接宾语变为被动语态的主语. His uncle gave him a dictionary yesterday.→He was given a dictionary by his uncle yesterday.
练习题:
把下列句子变为被动句: 1.They asked me to come a little later. →I ___ _____ to come a little later.
2.Women often talk about food and clothes. →Food and clothes ____ often _____ about by women.
3.Do they make this kind of truck in Nanjing? → ___this kind of truck _____ in Nanjing?
4.We must clean our teeth twice a day. →Our teeth must ___ ____ twice a day.
5.Can I answer this question in simple English? →_____this question __ ______ in simple English?
6.You may clean the room after work. → The room may _____ _______ after
work.
思考题:
1.We use brooms for sweeping the floor. → Brooms___ ___for sweeping the
floor.
2. They built quite a few tall buildings in their hometown last year.
→ Quite a few tall buildings ___ _____ in their hometown last year.
3. You must not put the bike there. → The bike ___ ____ _____there.
4. Can you see the stars in the daytime? → Can the stars _____ __in the
daytime?
句子（三）
四、祈使句：表示请求、命令、建议或劝告等的句子叫祈使句，主语you通常省
略。1、祈使句的肯定形式：一般以动词原形开头。 Open the door, please.
2、祈使句的否定形式：在句首谓语动词前加Don't。 Don't be late for
class.
3、说话对象是第一人称和第三人称时，表示建议做某事。 Let me/us
Let him/her/them eg. Let's go to school. 注意： 1)祈使句 ＋ and/or
＋ 简单句是常用句型
祈使句 + and + 简单句 表示?如果…，就…?
祈使句 + or + 简单句 表示?…否则…?
eg. 1.Go down the street,and you'll see a hospital. 2.Be quick,or we'll
be late.
2)在祈使句后面，常常附加一个问句，使语气更加委婉。
eg.⒈Tell me about it,will you/won't you? ⒉Don't tell anyone,will
you?
⒊Let's go to school,shall we? ⒋Let us go out to play for a while,will
you?
练习题 1)_____ on the thin ice. It's dangerous.
A.Don't skate B.Don't skating C.Skate D.Not skate
2)Let's fly the kite on the playground, _____ ______?（附加问句）
3)Please turn down the radio a bit, ____ _____?（附加问句）
句子的分类:由句子结构来讲，可分为三类简单
一、简单句：由一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语（或并列谓语）构成的句子。
eg. We cleaned the windows and tidied the room.
二、并列句：由并列连词and, but,so,or,for等把两个或两个以上的简单句连
起来的句子。 eg. 1)I come from China and he comes from Japan. 2)Hurry
up,or you'll miss the train.
3)He looked for it everywhere, but he couldn't find it.
4)She didn't know the answer to the question,so she asked the teacher.
5)He's interested in music while John is interested in sports.
三、复合句
A.宾语从句：宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语，引导宾语从句的关联词有
that, if/whether, what, who, whose, which, why, when, where, how等。
1、连接词 1)由连接词that引导陈述句，在口语中that常省略。
eg. He said that he would like to see the headmaster.
2)由连接词whether/if引导一般疑问句，whether和if 常可互换，但下列场合一般用whether.
⒈介词后的宾语从句：I'm thinking of whether he'll come.
⒉与or not连用：I don't know whether I should go or not.
3)由连接代词what,who(whom,whose)which或连接副词when,where,why,how引导特殊疑问句。 eg. Do you know who/whom she is waiting for?
2、语序：不管宾语从句是陈述句、一般疑问句或特殊疑问句，都要用陈述句语序，也就是说主谓次序不能颠倒。连接词＋主谓结构
(1).Bill wanted to know who did this. (2).I don't know what's the matter with Bob?
(3).I don't know what's wrong with them?
3、时态：一般说来，主从句时态要统一。如果主句是一般现在时，从句可根据需要用其它任何时态；如果主句是一般过去时，从句应该用相应的过去时态范畴（也就是用一般过去时，过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时）。
eg.⒈Lily wanted to know whether her grandma liked the handbag. ⒉I asked the teacher where we would have the meeting. ⒊Could you tell me how I can get to the zoo?
如果从句表明的是一个客观事实或真理，那么无论主句是什么时态，从句都只能用一般现在时。 eg. The teacher told us that light travels much faster than sound.
注意：在think后的宾语从句，如果需要表示否定意义，一般不在宾语从句中否定，而是在主句中否定。 eg. I don’t think that English is easy. I think that English is not easy. ( 误)
练习题：（一）
⒈How does he get on with his new classmates? Could you tell me? (改为含有宾语从句的复合句) Could you tell me how ____ _____ on with his new classmates?
⒉What is he doing there? Mother didn't know. (改为含有宾语从句的复合句)
Mother didn't know what _____ ______doing there.
⒊Could you tell me ________ they are talking about? A.where B.when
C.why D.what
⒋You'd better ask your mother whether is it cheap enough before you try it on.
⒌Excuse me.Could you tell me where ___________?
A.is the toilet B.the toilet is C.was the toiletD.the toilet was 句子（四）
四、祈使句：表示请求、命令、建议或劝告等的句子叫祈使句，主语you通常省略。
1、祈使句的肯定形式：一般以动词原形开头。 Open the door, please.
2、祈使句的否定形式：在句首谓语动词前加Don't。 Don't be late for class.
3、说话对象是第一人称和第三人称时，表示建议做某事。 Let me/us
Let him/her/them eg. Let's go to school.
注意： 1)祈使句 ＋ and/or ＋ 简单句是常用句型
祈使句 + and + 简单句 表示?如果…，就…? 祈使句 + or + 简单句 表示
?…否则…? eg. 1.Go down the street,and you'll see a hospital.
2.Be quick,or we'll be late. 2)在祈使句后面，常常附加一个问句，使语气更加委婉。 eg.⒈Tell me about it,will you/won't you? ⒉Don't tell anyone,will you? ⒊Let's go to school,shall we? ⒋Let us go out to play for a while,will you?
练习题
1)_____ on the thin ice. It's dangerous.
A.Don't skate B.Don't skating C.Skate D.Not skate
2)Let's fly the kite on the playground, _____ ______?（附加问句）
3)Please turn down the radio a bit, ____ _____?（附加问句）
句子的分类:由句子结构来讲，可分为三类简单
一、简单句：由一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语（或并列谓语）构成的句子。 eg. We cleaned the windows and tidied the room.
二、并列句：由并列连词and, but,so,or,for等把两个或两个以上的简单句连起来的句子。 eg. 1)I come from China and he comes from Japan.
2)Hurry up,or you'll miss the train. 3)He looked for it everywhere, but he couldn't find it.
4)She didn't know the answer to the question,so she asked the teacher.
5)He's interested in music while John is interested in sports.
三、复合句
A.宾语从句：宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语，引导宾语从句的关联词有that, if/whether, what, who, whose, which, why, when, where, how等。
1、连接词 1)由连接词that引导陈述句，在口语中that常省略。
eg. He said that he would like to see the headmaster.
2)由连接词whether/if引导一般疑问句，whether和if 常可互换，但下列场合一般用whether. ⒈介词后的宾语从句：I'm thinking of whether he'll come. ⒉与or not连用：I don't know whether I should go or not.
3)由连接代词what,who(whom,whose)which或连接副词when,where,why,how引导特殊疑问句。 eg. Do you know who/whom she is waiting for?
2、语序：不管宾语从句是陈述句、一般疑问句或特殊疑问句，都要用陈述句语序，也就是说主谓次序不能颠倒。连接词＋主谓结构
(1).Bill wanted to know who did this. (2).I don't know what's the matter with Bob?
(3).I don't know what's wrong with them?
3、时态：一般说来，主从句时态要统一。如果主句是一般现在时，从句可根据需要用其它任何时态；如果主句是一般过去时，从句应该用相应的过去时态范畴（也就是用一般过去时，过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时）。
eg.⒈Lily wanted to know whether her grandma liked the handbag. ⒉I asked the teacher where we would have the meeting.
⒊Could you tell me how I can get to the zoo?
如果从句表明的是一个客观事实或真理，那么无论主句是什么时态，从句都只
能用一般现在时。eg. The teacher told us that light travels much faster
than sound.
注意：在think后的宾语从句，如果需要表示否定意义，一般不在宾语从句
中否定，而是在主句中否定。 eg. I don’t think that English is easy. I
think that English is not easy. ( 误)
句子（五）
1、同义词组的转换：指不同的词组表达同一个意思，用另一个意义相同的词组
替换原句中的词组。 1)Did your parents have a good time in Hangzhou?
Did your parents _________ ___________ in Hangzhou?
2)Jane prefers English to maths. Jane _____ English ______ than
maths.
3)The smiths flew to London for their holiday yesterday afternoon.
The smiths ______to London for their holiday ___ ____yesterday
afternoon.
4)Yesterday Tom heard from his sister. Yesterday Tom ________ ______
______ ______ his sister.
5)The woman spent ￥200 on her handbag.
The woman ___ ￥200 __ her handbag. Her handbag ____ the woman ￥200.
6)Lily taught herself Japanese. Lily ___________ Japanese _____
_______.
7)Lin Feng is weak in English. Lin Feng ____ ______ ___ English.
2、反义词或词组的转换，相对于主语来说，动作发出的对象改变
1)They haven't written to their daughter for a long time.
The daughter ______ _______ from her parents for a long time.
2)The farmer borrowed a pan from the woman last week.
The woman ____ a pan ___ the farmer last week.
3)Remember to turn off the lights when you leave the room.
________ _______ to turn off the lights when you leave the room.
4)Lin Feng is weak in English.
Lin Feng ______ ____ ____ ____ English. Lin Feng _____ ______ ___
English.
3、比较等级的转换：形容词/副词的原级、比较级、最高级间的转换，通常
用more than, less than,as…as, not so…as连接。
1) Japanese is not so popular as English. Japanese is ______ popular
_______ English.
2) Jim runs faster than any other student in his class.
Jim runs ______ _______ all the students in his class.
______ runs ________ than Jim in his class. _____ runs ____ fast ___
Jim in his class.
3) He has more story-books than I. I haven't ________ many story-books
_______ he.
4、用连接词把两句合并为一句的转换。
1)The old woman was very angry.She couldn't say a word.
The old woman was ______ angry _____ say a word.
2)Edison was very clever.He could invent a lot of things.
Edison was _____ _______ ___ invent a lot of things.
3) Jane prefers English to maths. So does Ann.
________ Jane ________ Ann ________ English to maths.
4)You can do this before class, and you can also do it after class.
You can do this ______ before class ____ after class.
5) This shirt doesn't look nice. That shirt doesn't look nice, either.
_______ this shirt ______ that shirt _______nice.
5、不同句子结构的转换，主要指简单句、并列句和复合句间的转换
1)We found him a good pupil. We found _______ ______ _______ a good pupil.
2)The room is so small that my family can't live in it.
The room isn't ______ ________ ____ my family ___ live in.
The room is ______ small ________ my family _______ live in.
3)His grandfather died ten years ago. It ____ ten years ___ his
grandfather ______.
4)I'm not sure what I should do next. I'm not sure _____ ___ ____ next.
5)Hurry up, or you'll miss the train. ___ you ___ hurry up, you'll miss
the train.
6、根据句意的转换
1) Yesterday everyone of us went to the farm except Lucy.
________ Lucy _______ go to the farm with us yesterday.
2)Sam is friendly to his classmates and his classmates are friendly to
him.
Sam _______ ______ well with his classmates.
3)Lily was born ten minutes earlier than I was. I am ten minutes
_______ than Lily.
4)English is spoken by the largest number of people in the world.
English _____ the largest number of ________ in the world.
5)It's your turn to do it. It's _____ ____ you to do it.
6)The children can't wait to open their presents.
The children want to see the presents __ _____ __ ________.
7)The room is bright enough. There's _______ ______ in the room.
8)We can't finish the work if you don't help us. We can't finish
the work _____ _____ help.
9)It rained heavily last night. There ______ _____ _____ last
night.
10)He has lived in the city since he was born. He has lived in the city
_____ _____ ______.
11)The building is beautiful and there are many tall trees around it.
The building _____ many tall trees all _______ is beautiful.
7、其它
1)I spent two hours reading the book yesterday.
_____ ______ me two hours ______ _____ the book yesterday.
2)He bought the book two weeks ago. He _____ _____ the book ____ two
weeks.
3)You're very kind to help me with my maths.
___ __ very kind ___ you ___ help me with my maths.
4)Our teacher left the lab after he had got everything ready.
Our teacher ______ _______ the lab _____ he had got everything ready.
5)Jim said to Lin Feng, "Don't fill the pan too full." Jim ___ Lin
Feng __ __ fill the pan too full. 思考题： 1)My grandfather died ten years ago.
My grandfather ______ ______ ______ ______ ten years ago.
2)Spring goes on from March to May. Spring _______ from March ________
May.
3)The Great Wall is known to people all over the world.
People all over the world ______ ______ ______ _______.
4)I think it is different from Chinese names. I don't think it is
_____ _____ as Chinese names.
5)They planted millions of trees to save the farmland.
They planted millions of trees _____ _____ the farmland _____ ____
saved.
6)The man thinks the same as I. The man ______ ______ me.
怎样做好完形填空
1.先通读一遍全文，对全文内容、作者观点、态度、文体等各方面有个宏观了解。
虽然开始不可能完全了解短文内容，但起码要做到?八、九不离十?。弄清大意，
抓住了主题，便为正确选词打下了可靠的基础。 2.然后读一遍选项，知
道均有哪些备选项。
3.再读全文，并且可以边读边用铅笔试将所选的选项的内容填在空白处。这是一
个关键性的分析判断阶段。同学们要瞻前顾后，字斟句酌。不能只看空格前后两
个词，而是应该看完整的句子。这时，应调动你学过的全部语言知识，明确题目
是要考查你哪方面知识的掌握。4.再串读，看铅笔填上后，文章意思是否通顺，
语法语义是否准确，是否可恢复原貌。5.切不可不读全文，见一空填一词。
6.同学们要学会利用上下文中的各种语言线索和已有的语言知识来选词。
7.如果遇到一时难以确定的答案可先不填，先去做后面的，或有把握的，待填完
其他空白后，再回过头来做前面，有时候，前后空白往往形成互相提示和补充。
同时，同学们还可利用排除法，首先排除不合题意的选项，然后反复比较剩下的
选项，这样就可以略为简单一些。
8.最后还要利用自己各方面的知识和语言知识、历史知识、生活常识等，细微分
析比较，理解中心，全面验证。完形填空：（一）
One day a poor farmer was taking a bag of wheat to town. Suddenly the
bag _1_ from his horse onto the road.He did not know _2_ to do about it
because it was _3_ heavy for him to lift by himself. He only hoped that
someone would soon pass by and _4_ him a hand.
Just at this moment a man _5_ a horse came up to him. But the farmer's
heart sank when he saw who he was. It was the great man living _6_. The
farmer had hoped to ask another farmer or a poor man _7_ him to come along
and help him. He couldn't ask such a great man to help him. But to his
_8_ ,the great man got off his horse as soon as he came nearer. He said to the farmer, "I see you _9_ help, friend. How good it is that I'm here just at the right time. "Then he took one end of the bag, the farmer the other, they together raised it and put it on the horse.
"Sir," asked the farmer, "how can I pay you?"
"It's quite easy," the great man replied with _10_.
Wherever you see anyone else in trouble, do the same for him.
1、 A.fall B.fell C.falling D.fallen 2、 A.what B.how C.that
D.it
3、 A.very B.so C.quite D.too 4、 A.lend B.ask C.borrow
D.gave
5、 A.riding B.ride C.rode D.rides 6、 A.nearby B.faraway C.nearly
D.near
7、 A.as B.like C.to D.for 8、 A.surprised B.surprising
C.surprise D.surprises
9、 A.needs B.need C.to need D.needed
10、 A.smiles B.smile C.a smile D.an smile
（二）
Mr Brown had an umbrella(伞) shop in a small town.People sometimes (1) him broken umbrellas, and then he took them to a big shop in London. They were (2) there.
One day Mr Brown went to London by train. He (3) to take an umbrella with him that day. Sitting in front of him was a man with an umbrella standing (4) the seat. When the train arrived in London, Mr Brown (5) up the umbrella as he often did during his journey by train. Just as he was getting off, he was (6) by the man. He said angrily, "That's (7)!? Mr Brown's face turned red and he gave it back to the man at once.
When Mr Brown got to the big shop, the shopkeeper had got his six umbrellas ready. After a good look at (8) of them, he said, "You've mended them very well."
In the afternoon he got into the train again. The (9) man was in the same seat. He looked at Mr Brown and his six umbrellas, "You've had a(10)day," he said.
1、 A.showed B.passed C.returned D.brought 2、 A.kept B.mended
C.used D.sold
3、 A.wanted B.had C.forgot D.decided 4、 A.beside B.over
C.under D.from
5、 A.picked B.looked C.put D.dressed
6、 A.needed B.helped C.stopped D.remembered 7、 A.yours B.mine C.his
D.hers
8、 A.one B.each C.both D.any 9、 A.same B.other
C.forgetful D.kind
10、 A.hot B.rainy C.good D.bad
怎样做好中考阅读理解题（上）
1.浏览全文，了解全文的概貌。 2.采用顺读或倒读的方法 3.抓住要点，快速阅读。
4.找出主题句，弄清替代词的指代关系，推断句子结构。
5.分清表层理解和深层理解的含义。 6.突破生词关。 7.在做到以上各点的基础上，再用?排除法??一次判断??逐个分析?等方法来判断找出问题的正确答案。
（一） Last Sunday I saw the worst storm (暴雨) in years. It came suddenly and went on for three hours. After lunch, I went into my room and had a rest. The air was hot. All was quiet.
Then strong wind started blowing into my room. Pieces of paper on my desk flew high into the air and some flew out of the open window. As I ran to catch them,big drops of rain began to fall.
When I came back into my house, it was raining harder and harder. I tried hard and managed to close the window. Then I heard a loud sound from the back of the house. I ran out of my room to find out what had happened:a
big tree had fallen down and broken the top of the backroom.
1.The storm happened _______.
A.in the morning B.while he was in the back room C.in the afternoon
D.while he was in the garden.
2.Before the storm came, the weather was _____. A.cold B.cool
C.hot D.warm
3.The storm lasted for ___.
A.three hours B.more than three hours C.three days
D.less than three days
4.The strong wind blew some of the paper ____.
A.all over the floor B.into the back room C.out of the door
D.out of the window
5.The top of the back room was broken because of ___.
A.the strong wind B.the heavy rain C.the loud sound D.the fallen tree
（二） One day Tony was crossing the road when he was hit by a car. He fell and broke his arm. An ambulance(救护车) soon arrived and took Tony to a hospital. There a doctor operated on his arm. Then he put the arm in a cast(石膏).Tony couldn't move it at all.
"You must keep your arm in a cast for six weeks,"the doctor said. " You'llbe all right then. " At the end of six weeks, Tony went back to the hospital. The doctor took his arm out of the cast. "Can you move your arm,Tony?? he asked.
Tony tried to move his arm. At first it was difficult,but soon he could move it easily.
"Yes, it's fine," he said. "Thank you very much."
"In a few days it will be as good as new, " the doctor said. "Just exercises it a little."
"Will I be able to play the guitar(吉他)？" Tony asked.
The doctor smiled. "Of course you will,"he said."You'll have no problems."
"That is good news,"Tony said.? Because I couldn't play it at all before."
1.How did Tony break his arm?
A. A guitar fell on it. B. A doctor broke it.C. He was hit by a car.
2.How long did Tony have to keep his arm in a cast?
A.Several days.B.Less than a month.C.About a month and a half.
3.As soon as the doctor took off the cast____.
A.Tony could move his arm easily B.Tony could move his arm with some trouble
C.Tony was no longer able to move his arm
4.What did the doctor tell Tony to do after the cast was taken off?
A.Exercise his arm.B.Take some medicineC.Come back to the hospital again.
5.At last Tony became very happy because ____.
A.he thought he would be able to play the guitar.B.the doctor had given him a guitar
C.the doctor had told him that he could help him
（三）
This is really a very fast game. Both sides are fighting for the ball all the time. We are enjoying every minute of it. Loud shouts can be heard here and there.
Willis has the ball now. This is only his third game for England,but he's playing so well that it won't be his last, I'm quite sure.
Willis passes the ball to Cotton. Cotton kicks it over the heads of the Frenchmen towards the goal. But he's too far away. Dupont picks it up easily and throws it to Paton.
France and England still have one goal each, and there are only two minutes left. At this moment, anything can happen. Paton kicks the ballacross to Crozat. It‘s a beautiful kick. But Stevens jumps and just stops the ball with the side of his head. But Menier is there. He passes it to Crozat, and Crozat, without any hesitation(犹豫), puts he ball into the back of the goal. It's a great surprise to us. I've never seen such a goal like this.
And the game is over. France has won the cup.
1.It wouldn't be Willis' last game for England because ____.
A.he had played three already B.this was only his third time
C.he was a good player D.he had kicked three goals for England
2.Why couldn't Cotton kick the ball into the goal?
A.Willis was too far away from him. B.He wasn't near the goal.
C.Dupont picked the ball up easily. D.The Frenchmen stopped the ball with their heads.
3."At this moment, anything can happen" means "___".
A.The ninety minutes will end in a draw B.There is time for another goal
C.The game is nearly over D.Either A or B
4.How many goals had the French players kicked by the end of the match?
A.One B.Two C.Three D.Four
5.Who were all from the French team?
A.Cotton, Stevens, Menier and Crozat. B.Paton, Crozat, Sevens and Dupont.
C.Dupont, Crozat, Menier and Paton. D.Willis, Dupont,Cotton and Menier.
如何做好中考听力题
1.语音困难 :一是发音不准,特别是音相近的词,如 house--horse,much--March,hear--hair, sheep--ship,food---foot, mouth--mouse,quite--quiet,bed--bad,present--parent--peasant,
box--books,等.
再就是语速的变化所引起的一系列的问题、语速慢，听力材料与学生程度相当，能听懂。但语速快，听力材料低于学生的水平，也听不懂。这是由于平时对于连读，失去爆破、重读与弱读等缺少训练，因此对有些语音材料听不懂。
2.内容上的困难 :学生不是将注意力集中到最关键的部分.而是在一些虚词上或无关紧要的词上过多停留，影响对全文的理解。
3.心理上的障碍 :这是听力测试中至关重要的问题。由于过于紧张，本来能听懂的也听不懂了。
具体做法：(1) 看完题目，再听录音；(2) 果断选择，争取时间。
思维定势解题误区
思维定势，指的是我们习惯性的思维方式。学生在做题时往往会受固定搭配，习惯用法等思维方式的影响，凭着经验或感觉快速解题。当然，这有利于提高解题速度，但有时也会把学生的思维引向?歧路?。现举例分析，以引起大家注意。如：
1．Shanghai is larger than ___________ city in Jiangsu．
A．any B．any other C．other D．one
仔细分析该题，就会发现本句中两个比较的双方Shanghai和Jiangsu是?相互不包含?关系。此句实际是Shanghai与Jiangsu的任一个城市进行比较，故选A。
2．There are a lot __________ apples in this basket than in that one．
A．most B．more C．of D．much
此题学生往往会受短语a lot of的影响而选C，仔细研读该题则会发现此句是一个比较句型，句中的a lot实际上是用来修饰比较级的，该题的正确答案为B。
3．What did you ___________ at the meeting yesterday？
A．speak B．tell C．say D．talk
这道题学生一看会根据?在会上发言，speak at the meeting?这一短语而选A。实际上这一句的意思是?你昨天在会上讲什么了？?疑问词what在句中作动词say的宾语，指说的内容，故选取答案C。
4．The bus is coming．Let's___________．
A．get it on B．get it off C．get on it D．get it off
此题容易受?动词＋副词?短语的影响，把代词放在此结构的中间，而选答案A。表示上／下车时，此时on／off是介词，需要把代词放在on／off的后面，所以答案为C。
5．I'd heard a lot _________England．Some things were as I thought．
A．of B．about C．to D．for
此题表面一看很简单，根据短语a lot of 选答案A。再看看句意，?我听说许多英国?，则发现正确答案为B，意为?听到很多有关英国的情况，有些正如我想的一样?。
6．—Must I finish the work before five o'clock？
—No．You ___________ finish it before eight．
A．mustn't B．needn't C．can't D．can
对must引导的一般疑问句否定回答常用No，you needn't．结构。但细细分析本句，就可以从标点看出No和它后面的部分实为两个句子，结合句意，可知答案为D。
7．Can you it in English？
A．speak B．say C．tell D．talk一看到English，就联想到讲语言用动词speak，而选答案A。此题实际上是?你会用英语表达它吗？?此时in English译为?用英语?，在句子中作方式状语，而it是say的宾语。因此选C。
8．There a film tomorrow evening．
A．will have B．have C．is going to be D．has此句意思很明显，?明天晚上有电影?。?有?易受汉语影响而选答案A。实际上本句应用here be句型，
第一主题英语语法系统全解一第1章动词时态24楼第2章被动语态57楼第3章虚拟语气911楼第4章情态动词1216楼第5章动词不定式1…
高中英语语法总结大全之名词名词概论名词可以分为专有名词ProperNouns和普通名词CommonNouns专有名词是某个些人地方…
高中英语语法权威解析目录第01章名词性从句第02章It用法及其句型和固定搭配讲解第03章高中英语语法中的省略现象第04章主谓一致第…
1高中英语语法总结大全名词情况构成方法读音例词以辅音字母y结尾的词变y为i再加es读zbabybabies其它名词复数的规则变化1…
高中英语语法总结大全之虚拟语气虚拟语气1）概念虚拟语气用来表示说话人的主观愿望或假想，所说的是一个条件，不一定是事实，或与事实相反…
光阴似箭，岁月如梭，转眼一学期的教学工作已经结束。本学期，我继续担任五年级的语文教学工作，回首这一学期的教学工作，感触颇深。一、基…
一、9月份工作总结1、店面客流量统计分析：9月份客流量统计：进店客户总批次为91批次，其中意向客户为20批次，厨房意向客户占80%…
本次期中考试题型、题量、分值分配及比例基本按照中考模式。非选择题20道20分，占40%。由于本次考试为闭卷形式，非选择题根据中招试…
个人工作总结一年来，本人在上级领导的带领和指导下，在同事们的关心和帮助下，自己的思想、工作、学习等各方面都取得了一定的成绩，个人综…
（20xx——20xx）学年度第一学期首先，我仅代表演讲小组全体成员感谢大家这一学期对本小组的关注与支持，在此也诚挚的邀请有兴趣的…